Lexicon Stereo Amplifier MPX G2 User Manual

MPX G2  
G uita r Effe c ts Pro c e sso r  
Use r G uid e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dansk  
Suomi  
Vigtig information om sikkerhed  
Tärkeitä turvallisuusohjeita  
Säilytä nämä ohjeet tulevaa käyttöä varten.  
Gem denne vejledning til senere brug.  
Seuraa kaikkia yksikköön merkittyjä ohjeita ja varoituksia.  
Følg alle anvisninger og advarsler på apparatet.  
Käytäainaoikeaaverkkojännitettä.Tehovaatimuksetselviävätvalmistajan  
käyttöohjeista. Huomaa, että eri käyttöjännitteet saattavat vaatia  
toisenlaisen verkkojohdon ja/tai -pistokkeen käytön.  
Apparatet skal altid tilsluttes den korrekte spænding. Der henvises til  
brugsanvisningen, der indeholder specifikationer for strømforsyning. Der  
gøres opmærksom på, at ved varierende driftsspændinger kan det blive  
nødvendigt at bruge andre lednings- og/eller stiktyper.  
Älä asenna yksikköä telineeseen jossa ei ole tuuletusta, tai välittömästi  
lämpöä tuottavien laitteiden, esim. tehovahvistimien, yläpuolelle.  
Ympäristön lämpötila käytössä ei saa ylittää tuotespesifikaation  
maksimilämpötilaa.  
Apparatet må ikke monteres i et kabinet uden ventilation eller lige over  
andet udstyr, der udvikler varme, f.eks. forstærkere. Den maksimale  
omgivelsestemperatur ved drift, der står opført i specifikationerne, skal  
overholdes.  
Kotelo on varustettu tuuletusreiillä ja -aukoilla. Luotettavan toiminnan  
varmistamiseksi ja ylilämpenemisen välttämiseksi näitä aukkoja ei saa  
sulkeatai peittää. Mitäänesineitäei saatyöntäätuuletusaukkoihin. Mitään  
nesteitä ei saa kaataa yksikköön.  
Der er ventilationsåbninger i kabinettet. For at sikre apparatets drift og  
hindreoverophedningmådisseåbningerikkeblokeres ellertildækkes. Stik  
aldrig noget ind igennem ventilationsåbningerne, og pas på aldrig at spilde  
nogen form for væske på apparatet.  
Tuoteonvarustettu3-johtimisellamaadoitetullaverkkopistokkeella. Tämä  
on turvallisuustoiminne eikä sitä saa poistaa.  
Dette apparat er forsynet med et stik med jordforbindelse. Denne  
sikkerhedsforanstaltning må aldrig omgås.  
Älä kytke audiotehovahvistimen lähtöjä suoraan mihinkään yksikön  
liittimeen.  
Udgangsstik fra audioforstærkere må aldrig sættes direkte i apparatet.  
Sähköiskun ja palovaaran välttämiseksi yksikkö ei saa olla sateessa tai  
kosteassa, eikä sitä saa käyttää märässä ympäristössä.  
Apparatet må ikke udsættes for regn eller fugt og må ikke bruges i  
nærheden af vand for at undgå risiko for elektrisk stød og brand.  
Älä käytä yksikköä jos se on pudonnut, vaurioitunut, kostunut, tai jos sen  
suorituskyky on huomattavasti muuttunut, mikä vaatii huoltoa.  
Apparatet må aldrig bruges, hvis det er blevet stødt, beskadiget eller vådt,  
eller hvis ændringer i ydelsen tyder på, at det trænger til eftersyn.  
Yksikön saa avata vain laitteeseen perehtynyt huoltohenkilö. Kansien  
poisto altistaa sinut vaarallisille jännitteille.  
Dette apparat må kun åbnes af fagfolk. Hvis dækslet tages af, udsættes  
man for livsfarlig højspænding.  
Tämä kolmio, joka esiintyy komponentissasi, varoittaa sinua  
eristämättömänvaarallisenjännitteenesiintymisestäyksikönsisällä.  
Tämä jännite saattaa olla riittävän korkea aiheuttamaan  
sähköiskuvaaran.  
Dennemærkatpåkomponentenadvareromuisoleret,farligspænding  
i apparatet ... høj nok til at give elektrisk stød.  
Denne mærkat på komponenten advarer om vigtig drifts- og  
vedligeholdsinformation i den tilhørende litteratur.  
Tämä kolmio, joka esiintyy komponentissasi, kertoo sinulle, että  
tässä tuotedokumentoinnissa esiintyy tärkeitä käyttö- ja ylläpito-  
ohjeita.  
Norsk  
Svenska  
Viktig informasjon om sikkerhet  
Viktiga säkerhetsföreskrifter  
Ta vare på denne veiledningen for senere bruk.  
Spara dessa föreskrifter för framtida bruk.  
Følg alle anvisningene og advarslene som er angitt på apparatet.  
Följ alla anvisningar och varningar som anges på enheten.  
Apparatet skal alltid anvendes med korrekt spenning. Produktbeskrivelsen  
inneholder spesifikasjoner for strømkrav. Vær oppmerksom på at det ved  
ulike driftsspenninger kan være nødvendig å bruke en annen ledning- og/  
eller støpseltype.  
Använd alltid rätt nätspänning. Se tillverkarens bruksanvisningar för infor-  
mation om effektkrav. Märkväl, att andra matningsspänningar eventuellt  
kräver att en annan typs nätsladd och/eller kontakt används.  
Installerainteenheteni ettoventileratstativ, ellerdirektovanförutrustningar  
som avger värme, t ex effektförstärkare. Se till att omgivningens temperatur  
vid drift inte överskrider det angivna värdet i produktspecifikationen.  
Apparatet skal ikke monteres i skap uten ventilasjon, eller direkte over  
varmeproduserende utstyr, som for eksempel kraftforsterkere. Den  
maksimale romtemperaturen som står oppgitt i produktbeskrivelsen, skal  
overholdes.  
Behållaren är försedd med hål och öppningar för ventilering. För att  
garantera tillförlitlig funktion och förhindra överhettning får dessaöppningar  
inteblockerasellertäckas.Ingaföremålfårskuffasingenomventilationshålen.  
Inga vätskor får spillas på enheten.  
Apparatet er utstyrt med ventilasjonsåpninger. For at apparatet skal være  
pålitelig i bruk og ikke overopphetes, må disse åpningene ikke blokkeres  
eller tildekkes. Stikk aldri noe inn i ventilasjonsåpningene, og pass på at det  
aldri søles noen form for væske på apparatet.  
Produkten är försedd med en jordad 3-trådskontakt. Detta är en  
säkerhetsfunktion som inte får tas ur bruk.  
Dette apparatet er utstyrt med et jordet støpsel. Dette er en  
sikkerhetsforanstaltning som ikke må forandres.  
Anslut aldrig audioeffektförstärkarutgångar direkt till någon av enhetens  
kontakter.  
Utgangsplugger fra audioforsterkere skal aldri koples direkte til apparatet.  
För att undvika elstöt eller brandfara får enheten inte utsättas för regn eller  
fukt, eller användas på ställen där den blir våt.  
Unngå brannfare og elektrisk støt ved å sørge for at apparatet ikke utsettes  
for regn eller fuktighet og ikke anvendes i nærheten av vann.  
Använd inte enheten om den har fallit i golvet, skadats, blivit våt, eller om  
dess prestanda förändrats märkbart, vilket kräver service.  
Apparatet skal ikke brukes hvis det har blitt utsattfor støt, er skadet eller blitt  
vått, eller hvis endringer i ytelsen tyder på at det trenger service.  
Enheten får öppnas endast av behörig servicepersonal. Farliga spänningar  
blir tillgängliga när locken tas bort.  
Dette apparatet skal kun åpnes av fagfolk. Hvis dekselet fjernes, utsettes  
man for livsfarlig høyspenning.  
Denna triangel, som visas på din komponent, varnar dig om en  
oisoleradfarligspänninginneienheten.Dennaspänningäreventuellt  
så hög att fara för elstöt föreligger.  
Komponenten er merket med denne trekanten, som er en advarsel  
om at det finnes uisolert, farlig spenning inne i kabinettet ... høy nok  
til å utgjøre en fare for elektrisk støt.  
Komponenten er merket med denne trekanten, som betyr at den  
tilhørende litteraturen inneholder viktige opplysninger om drift og  
vedlikehold.  
Denna triangel, som visas på din komponent, anger att viktiga  
bruksanvisningar och serviceanvisningar ingår i dokumentationen i  
fråga.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deutsch  
Español  
Wichtige Sicherheitsanweisungen  
Instrucciones importantes de seguridad  
Heben Sie sich diese Sicherheitsanweisungen auch für später auf.  
Guarde esta instrucciones para uso posterior.  
BefolgenSiealleaufderVorrichtungstehendenAnweisungenundWarnungen.  
Utilice siempre el voltaje correcto. Diríjase a las instrucciones de operación  
del fabricante para obtener las especificaciones de potencia. Esté al tanto  
de que voltajes de operación distintos requieren el uso de cables y/o  
enchufes distintos.  
ImmernurmitderrichtigenSpannungverwenden!DieGebrauchsanweisungen  
des Herstellers informieren Sie über die elektrischen Anforderungen.  
Vergessen Sie nicht daß bei verschiedenen Betriebsspannungen ggf. auch  
verschiedene Leitungskabel und/oder Verbindungsstecker zu verwenden  
sind.  
Noinstaleestaunidadenunestantesinventilación, nitampocodirectamente  
encima de equipos que generen calor tales como amplificadores de  
potencia. Fíjese en las temperaturas ambientales máximas de operación  
que se mencionan en las especificaciones del producto.  
Stellen Sie die Vorrichtung nicht in ein unbelüftetes Gestell oder unmittelbar  
über wärmeerzeugende Geräte wie z.B. Tonverstärker. Halten Sie die in den  
Produktspezifikationen angegebene maximale Umgebungstemperatur bei  
Betrieb ein.  
Las aperturas y ranuras del chasis sirven para proveer la ventilación  
necesaria para operar la unidad con seguridad  
y
para prevenir  
Schlitze und Öffnungen im Gehäuse dienen der Belüfung; um verläßlichen  
BetriebsicherzustellenundÜberheizenzuvermeidendürfendieseÖffnungen  
nich verstopft oder abgedeckt werden. Stecken Sie nie irgend einen  
GegenstanddurchdieBelüftungsschlitze. VergießenSiekeineFlüssigkeiten  
auf den Apparat.  
sobrecalentamiento, y porlotantono puedenserobstruidas ocubiertas. No  
introduzca objetos de ningún tipo a través de las ranuras de ventilación, y  
nunca deje caer ningún líquido sobre la unidad.  
Este producto está equipado con un enchufe de 3 clavijas con conexión a  
tierra. Éste es un elemento de seguridad que no debe ser eliminado.  
Dieses Produkt is mit einem 3-drahtigen Erdungsstecker ausgerüstet. Diese  
Sicherheitsmaßnahme darf nicht unwirksam gemacht werden.  
Nuncaconecteningúntipodesalidadeamplificadoresdesonidodirectamente  
a los conectores de la unidad.  
SchließenSienieTonverstärkerunmittelbaraneinenAnschlußdesApparates  
an.  
Paraprevenirdescargas eléctricas oincendios, mantengalaunidadalejada  
de la lluvia, humedad o cualquier lugar en el que pueda entrar en contacto  
con agua.  
Um elektrischen Schlag oder Feuer zu vermeiden, setzen Sie den Apparat  
weder Regen noch Feuchtigkeit aus und betreiben Sie ihn nicht dort wo  
Wasser eindringen könnte.  
Notratedehacerfuncionarlaunidadsisehacaído, estádañada, haentrado  
en contacto con líquidos, o si nota cualquier cambio brusco en su  
funcionamiento que indique la necesidad de hacerle un servicio de  
mantenimiento.  
Versuchen Sie nicht den Apparat zu betreiben falls er fallen gelassen,  
beschädigt, oder Flüssigkeiten ausgesetzt wurde, oder falls sich seine  
ArbeitsweisederartändertdaßdarauseinBedarfnachRaparaturzuschließen  
ist.  
Estaunidaddeberáserabiertaúnicamenteporpersonal calificado. Si usted  
quita las coberturas se expondrá a voltajes peligrosos.  
DieserApparat solltenurvon qualifiziertenFachleutengeöffnetwerden. Das  
Abnehmen von Abdeckungen setzt Sie gefährlichen Spannungen aus.  
Este triángulo que aparece en su componente le advierte sobre la  
existencia dentro del chasis de voltajes peligrosos sin aislantes ...  
voltajes que son lo suficientemente grandes como para causar  
electrocución.  
Dieses Dreieck auf Ihrem Apparat warnt Sie vor nicht-isolierter,  
gefährlicher Spannung im Gehäuse ... stark genug um eine  
Berührungsgefahr darzustellen.  
Dieses Dreieck auf Ihrem Apparat bedeutet daß wichtige Betriebs-  
und Wartungsanweisungen in der mitgelieferten Dokumentation zu  
finden sind.  
Este triángulo que aparece en su componente lo alerta sobre las  
instrucciones de operación y mantenimiento importantes que están  
en los materiales de lectura que se incluyen.  
Français  
Italiano  
Instructions de Sûreté Importantes  
Importanti norme di sicurezza  
Gardez ces instructions pour réference future.  
Conservare le presenti norme per l’utilizzo futuro.  
Observez toutes les instructions et tous les avertissements marqués sur  
l’appareil.  
Osservare tutte le istruzioni e le avvertenze apposte sull’unità.  
Utilizzare esclusivamente con la tensione di rete corretta. Consultare le  
istruzioni operative fornite dal fabbricante per i dati riguardanti la tensione e  
l’assorbimento di corrente. Potrebbe essere necessario l’uso di cavi di rete  
e/o di spine diverse a seconda della tensione utilizzata.  
Branchez uniquements sur un réseau de tension indiquée. Consultez le  
manuel d’instruction du fabriquant pour les spécifications de courant.  
N’oubliez pas que différentes tensions peuvent nécessiter l’utilisation de  
cables et/ou de fiches de connexion différents.  
Noninstallarel’unitàinunoscaffaleprivodiventilazioneoppuredirettamente  
sopraunafontedicalore, come,adesempio, unamplificatore. Nonsuperare  
la temperatura ambientale massima di funzionamento riportata nei dati  
tecnici del prodotto.  
N’installez pas l’appareil en un compartiment non-aéré ou directement au-  
dessus d’équipements générateurs de chaleur, tels qu’amplificateurs de  
courants, etc. Ne dépassez pas la température ambiante maximale de  
fonctionnement indiquée dans les spécifications du produit.  
Le fessure e le altre aperture nellascatola servono alla ventilazione. Per un  
funzionamento affidabile, e per evitare un eventuale surriscaldamento,  
questeaperturenonvannoostruiteocoperteinnessunmodo. Evitareintutti  
icasidiinserireoggettidiqualsiasigenereattraversolefessurediventilazione.  
Non versare mai del liquido di nessun tipo sull’unità.  
Des fentes et ouvertures sont prévues dans le boîtier pour l’aération; Pour  
assurerlebonfonctionnementetpourprévenirl’échauffement,cesouvertures  
ne doivent pas être couvertes ou bloquées. N’insérez pas d’objets dans les  
fentes d’aération. Empêchez tout liquide de se répandre sur l’appareil.  
Ce produit est muni d’une fiche à trois fils pour la mise à terre. Ceci est une  
mesure de sécurité et ne doit pas être contrariée.  
Questo prodotto viene fornito con una spina a 3 fili con massa. Tale  
dispositivo di sicurezza non va eliminato.  
Ne connectez jamais d’amplificateurs audio directement aux connecteurs  
de l’appareil.  
Evitaresempredi collegareleuscitedell’amplificatoreaudiodirettamenteai  
connettori dell’unità.  
Pourempêcherleschocsélectriquesetledangerd’incendie,évitezd’exposer  
l’appareil à la pluie ou à l’humidité, et ne le mettez pas en marche en un  
endroit où il serait exposé aux éclaboussures d’eau.  
Per prevenire il pericolo di folgorazionee di incendionon esporre l’unitàalla  
pioggiaoadun’umiditàeccessiva;evitarediadoperarel’unitàdovepotrebbe  
entrare in contatto con acqua.  
N’essayez pas de faire fonctionner l’appareil s’il est tombé à terre, a été  
endommangé, exposé à un liquide, ou si vous observez des différences  
nettes dans son fonctionnement, indiquant la nécessité de réparations.  
Evitare di adoperare l’unità se la stessa è stata urtata violentemente, se ha  
subito un danno, se è stata esposta ad un liquido o in caso di un evidente  
cambiamento delle prestazioni che indichi la necessità di un intervento di  
assistenza tecnica.  
Cet appareil ne doit être ouvert que par un personnel de service qualifié. En  
enlevant les couvercles vous vous exposez à des tensions électriques  
dangereuses.  
Ogniinterventosull’unitàvaeseguitoesclusivamentedapersonalequalificato.  
La rimozione della copertura comporta l’esposizione al pericolo di  
folgorazione.  
Ce triangle, sur votre appareil vous avertit de la présence de tension  
dangereuse, non-isolée à l’intérieur du boîtier...une tension suffisante  
pour représenter un danger d’électrocution.  
Il presente triangolo impresso sul componente avverte della presenza  
di tensioni pericolose non isolate all’interno della copertura... tali  
tensioni rappresentano un pericolo di folgorazione  
Ce triangle sur sur votre appareil vous invite de suivre d’importantes  
instructions d’utilisation et d’entretien dans la documentation livrée  
avec le produit.  
Il presente triangolo impresso sul componente avverte l’utente della  
presenzanelladocumentazioneallegatadiimportantiistruzionirelative  
al funzionamento ed alla manutenzione.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Introduction  
1. Product Overview  
The Front Panel .................................................................................. 1-1  
The Rear Panel................................................................................... 1-2  
Installation Notes ................................................................................ 1-3  
Mounting ...................................................................................... 1-3  
Power Requirements .................................................................... 1-3  
Quick Start .......................................................................................... 1-3  
Stand alone .................................................................................. 1-4  
Amp Input Only ............................................................................ 1-5  
Amp Input & FX Loop ................................................................... 1-6  
Connecting Other Equipment ............................................................. 1-8  
Signal Flow ....................................................................................... 1-10  
Digital Audio Paths ........................................................................... 1-11  
Internal Grounding ............................................................................ 1-11  
Unbalanced Connections.................................................................. 1-11  
Guitar Input ....................................................................................... 1-11  
Main Outputs .................................................................................... 1-11  
Insert Send ....................................................................................... 1-12  
Insert Returns ................................................................................... 1-12  
Automatic Insert Return Signal Routing............................................ 1-12  
Right (Mono) Only ..................................................................... 1-12  
Stereo......................................................................................... 1-12  
Left Only ..................................................................................... 1-12  
Connecting the main Outputs to Mono Input .................................... 1-13  
Setting Audio Levels ......................................................................... 1-13  
Using Soft Sat ................................................................................... 1-13  
Input Level and Clip Indicators ......................................................... 1-13  
Aux In and Clip Indicators ................................................................. 1-13  
Look here for connector  
information and Quick  
Start configurations  
2. Basic Operation  
MPX G2 Menus .................................................................................. 2-1  
Loading and Playing with Programs ................................................... 2-2  
Program Load .............................................................................. 2-2  
Effect Bypass ............................................................................... 2-3  
Insert Bypass ............................................................................... 2-3  
Dedicated Analog Controllers ...................................................... 2-3  
Programmable Bypass Modes ..................................................... 2-4  
Tuner ............................................................................................ 2-4  
Tap ............................................................................................... 2-4  
A/B ............................................................................................... 2-5  
Soft Row Editing ................................................................................. 2-5  
Using the DataBase ............................................................................ 2-6  
Program Store .................................................................................... 2-7  
Easy operation of the  
MPX G2 — loading, playing  
with, and storing programs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents, cont'd.  
3. Editing  
Effect Editing ...................................................................................... 3-1  
The MPX G2 Edit Menus .................................................................... 3-3  
Mix ............................................................................................... 3-4  
Adjusting Pre-Gain and Post-Gain Level ............................... 3-4  
Speaker Sim................................................................................. 3-5  
Automatic Speaker Sim Routing ............................................ 3-6  
Noise Gate ................................................................................... 3-7  
Meters .......................................................................................... 3-8  
Effect Order .................................................................................. 3-9  
Routing Map ............................................................................... 3-10  
How to Change Routing Connections.................................. 3-12  
How to Change Routing Options ......................................... 3-12  
Routing Examples................................................................ 3-13  
Notes and Tips on Routing .................................................. 3-16  
Patching (See Chapter 4) ........................................................... 3-16  
Controllers (Knob, LFO 1 and 2, Random, A/B and Env ) ......... 3-17  
Tempo ........................................................................................ 3-18  
Rate ..................................................................................... 3-18  
Source ................................................................................. 3-18  
Beat Value ........................................................................... 3-19  
Tap Source .......................................................................... 3-19  
Compare .................................................................................... 3-19  
Soft Row Parameter Assignment ............................................... 3-20  
DataBase Assignmments ........................................................... 3-20  
Copy Effect................................................................................. 3-22  
Check here for information  
on editing Effects and  
programs.  
4. Patching  
Selecting a Source and Destination.................................................... 4-2  
Changing the Range of the Source Controller .................................... 4-3  
Viewing Source Controller Activity ............................................... 4-3  
MIDI Learn — Automatic Controller Assignment ......................... 4-4  
Copying Patches ................................................................................ 4-4  
Changing the Range of the Destination Parameter ............................ 4-5  
Linear or Nonlinear Control .......................................................... 4-6  
Suspending and Clearing Patches ..................................................... 4-7  
Multiple Patches with the Same Destination....................................... 4-7  
All about the MPX G2  
Patch System  
5. System Controls  
The System Menus............................................................................. 5-1  
Audio Controls .................................................................................... 5-1  
Soft Sat ........................................................................................ 5-1  
Output Mode ................................................................................ 5-1  
Modes ............................................................................................... 5-2  
Pgm Load ..................................................................................... 5-2  
Mix ............................................................................................... 5-2  
Send Bypass ................................................................................ 5-2  
Pgm Bypass ................................................................................. 5-2  
Tempo Mode ................................................................................ 5-3  
Memory Protect ............................................................................ 5-3  
Brightness .................................................................................... 5-3  
Sleep ............................................................................................ 5-3  
Post Bypass ................................................................................. 5-4  
Complete details on all  
of the MPX G2 System  
parameters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents, cont'd.  
Insert ............................................................................................ 5-4  
FX Loop ................................................................................. 5-4  
Mix ......................................................................................... 5-4  
Parallel ................................................................................... 5-4  
Setup Load and Setup Store ........................................................ 5-5  
MIDI  
............................................................................................... 5-7  
Program Change/Options: Pgm# Offset, Pgm+ and Pgm- .......... 5-7  
Receive ........................................................................................ 5-7  
Transmit ....................................................................................... 5-7  
Ctl Send/Options: MIDI Reset ...................................................... 5-8  
Ctl Smooth ................................................................................... 5-8  
Clock Send ................................................................................... 5-8  
Automation/Options: Xmit Device ID ............................................ 5-9  
SysEx/Options: Receive Device ID .............................................. 5-8  
Soft Thru ...................................................................................... 5-9  
Dump/Options: Xmit Speed.......................................................... 5-9  
MIDI Maps ........................................................................................ 5-10  
Program Chains ................................................................................ 5-11  
Initialize ............................................................................................. 5-12  
Clear Programs................................................................................. 5-13  
Copy Programs ................................................................................. 5-14  
Global Patches/Options: MIDI Learn and Dst Edit............................ 5-15  
Calibrate Pedal ................................................................................. 5-16  
Bypass Patches ................................................................................ 5-16  
Tuner Mode ...................................................................................... 5-17  
Global Effects ................................................................................... 5-17  
Speaker Sim Mode..................................................................... 5-18  
Noise Gate Mode ....................................................................... 5-18  
Reverb Mode.............................................................................. 5-18  
Bypass Mode ............................................................................. 5-18  
6. MIDI Operation  
Selecting a MIDI Channel ................................................................... 6-1  
Accessing Programs ........................................................................... 6-1  
Controlling MPX G2 Tempo Rate with MIDI Clock ............................. 6-2  
MIDI Tempo Control ..................................................................... 6-2  
Using the MPX G2 as a MIDI Clock Source ................................. 6-2  
Slaving two or more MPX G2s ..................................................... 6-3  
Controller Quirks ................................................................................. 6-4  
The Knob, Footpedal and Footswitch as MIDI Controllers ................. 6-4  
Program Change Messages ............................................................... 6-5  
Automation ......................................................................................... 6-6  
SysEx Automation ........................................................................ 6-6  
Controller Automation .................................................................. 6-6  
Reset All Controllers .................................................................... 6-6  
MIDI Clock and Clock Commands ............................................... 6-6  
Dynamic MIDI............................................................................... 6-7  
Bulk Data Dumps ................................................................................ 6-7  
MIDI Implementation Chart ................................................................. 6-8  
Information on working  
with MIDI  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. The Effects and Parameters  
Contents, cont'd.  
Notes on Combining Effects ............................................................... 7-2  
Notes on Controlling Effect Parameters ............................................. 7-2  
Notes on the Effect Descriptions ........................................................ 7-2  
Gain Effects ........................................................................................ 7-3  
Tone ............................................................................................. 7-3  
Crunch.......................................................................................... 7-3  
Screamer...................................................................................... 7-4  
Overdrive...................................................................................... 7-5  
Distortion ...................................................................................... 7-6  
Preamp and SplitPreamp ............................................................. 7-6  
Effect1 and Effect2 ............................................................................. 7-8  
Detune (M), Detune (S) and Detune (D) – Effect1 only................ 7-8  
Shift (M), Shift (S) and Shift (D) – Effect1 only ............................. 7-9  
DiatonicHmy – Effect1 only ........................................................ 7-10  
Panner........................................................................................ 7-11  
Auto Pan .................................................................................... 7-11  
Tremolo (M) and Tremolo (S) ..................................................... 7-12  
UniVybe...................................................................................... 7-12  
CustomVybe............................................................................... 7-13  
Phaser ........................................................................................ 7-13  
OrangePhase ............................................................................. 7-14  
Red Comp .................................................................................. 7-14  
Blue Comp ................................................................................. 7-15  
DigiDrive1 and DigiDrive2 .......................................................... 7-15  
OctaBuzz.................................................................................... 7-16  
SweepFilter ................................................................................ 7-17  
1-Band (M) ................................................................................. 7-17  
Wah 1, Wah 2 and PedalWah1, PedalWah2 ............................. 7-18  
Volume (M), Volume (S) and Volume (D) .................................. 7-19  
PedalVol and ExtPedalVol ......................................................... 7-19  
Test Tone ................................................................................... 7-20  
Click ........................................................................................... 7-20  
Chorus Effects .................................................................................. 7-21  
Chorus........................................................................................ 7-21  
Detune (M) ................................................................................. 7-22  
Flanger (M), Flanger24 (M) and Flanger (S) .............................. 7-23  
Rotary Cab ................................................................................. 7-24  
Aerosol ....................................................................................... 7-24  
Orbits.......................................................................................... 7-25  
Centrifuge1 and Centrifuge2 ...................................................... 7-26  
Comb 1 and Comb 2 .................................................................. 7-27  
Volume (M), Volume (S) and Volume (D) .................................. 7-28  
PedalVol and ExtPedalVol ......................................................... 7-28  
Delay Effects .................................................................................... 7-29  
Delay (M), Delay (S) and Delay (D) ........................................... 7-30  
Echo (M), Echo (S) and Echo (D) .............................................. 7-31  
Looper ........................................................................................ 7-32  
JamMan ..................................................................................... 7-33  
Ducker ........................................................................................ 7-34  
Complete details on all  
of the MPX G2 Effects  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents, cont'd.  
Reverb Effects .................................................................................. 7-35  
Chamber .................................................................................... 7-35  
Hall ............................................................................................. 7-35  
Plate ........................................................................................... 7-36  
Ambience ................................................................................... 7-36  
Gate ........................................................................................... 7-37  
EQ Effects ........................................................................................ 7-38  
1-Band (M), 2-Band (M), 3-Band (M) and 4-Band (M) ............... 7-40  
1-Band (S) and 2-Band (S) ........................................................ 7-40  
1-Band (D) and 2-Band (D) ........................................................ 7-41  
Fc Splitter ................................................................................... 7-41  
Crossover ................................................................................... 7-42  
Volume (M), Volume (S) and Volume (D)................................... 7-42  
PedalVol and ExtPedalVol ......................................................... 7-43  
8. MPX G2 Internal Controllers  
Knob ............................................................................................... 8-1  
LFO1 and LFO2 .................................................................................. 8-1  
Random Generator ............................................................................. 8-2  
A/B Glide ............................................................................................ 8-2  
Complete descriptions of  
the MPX G2 Internal  
controllers  
Env  
............................................................................................... 8-3  
Footswitch Controllers ........................................................................ 8-3  
9. Program Descriptions  
1-99: Amp Input + FX Loop ................................................................ 9-1  
100-149: Amp Input Only .................................................................. 9-15  
150-248: Stand Alone ....................................................................... 9-20  
249-250: Utility (All configurations: Unity Gain and Clean Slate) ...... 9-30  
Complete descriptions of  
the MPX G2 programs  
10. Troubleshooting  
Low Voltage ...................................................................................... 10-1  
Overheating ...................................................................................... 10-1  
Common MIDI Problems .................................................................. 10-1  
Power On Behavior........................................................................... 10-2  
Check here for solutions  
to common problems  
11. Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Foreword  
Whenwe started development ontheMPXG2Guitar Effects Processor andthe  
MPX R1 MIDI Remote Controller, we knew we were designing for the most  
discriminitatingguitarists — players whose tonal foundationis basedonthis no-  
compromise equation:  
great guitar + great amp = great tone  
Our challenge was to put together a guitar effects system that could mesh with  
your favorite gear and not get in the way of your signature sound. Since we had  
no intention of trying to duplicate the “great amp” portion of the equation inside  
of our effects processor, we needed to make the MPX G2 capable of putting  
effects in two places at the same time — between the guitar and your amp (like  
stomp boxes) or in your amp’s effects loop (like rack effects). Add to that the  
challenge of getting the sounds right, and combining analog and digital effects  
in a roadworthy package, and you’re definitely into something totally new.  
So, here it is. A lot of people have put a lot of sweat into this box so you could  
do what you do best — so get out there and play.  
Throughout the development process of our Custom Shop products, we’ve  
had the help of a team of artist advisors. Time and again their input had a  
majorimpact onboththeMPXG2Guitar EffectsProcessorandMPXR1MIDI  
RemoteController. Somewerewithusatthebeginning,whentheseproducts  
were just concepts on paper, others joined us as various prototypes came  
roaring to life.  
Jon Finn, Dave Friedman of Rack Systems Ltd., Michael James, Eddie  
Kramer,PeterMcCabeofToneKingStudio, JohnMcIntyre,BobbyOwsinski,  
John Petrucci, Blues Saraceno, Alex Saraceno, David Torn and Carl  
Verheyen — each made significant contributions, including:  
putting their reputations on the line by working with experimental  
gear in front of large paying audiences — or in critical sessions with  
the clock ticking, so that we could evaluate under real-world condi-  
tions.  
sharing secrets, tips and tricks — “How did you get that sound on  
(insert hit tune from platinum record)?”  
spending hours and hours of critical listening time to help us  
evaluateour workasit progressed, andlettingusknow whenwehad  
to go back to the drawing board.  
Thanks to each of you for applying your consummate skills to this project.  
Your faith, encouragement, enthusiasm and patience helped us get it right.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Thank you for your purchase oftheMPXG2 Guitar Effects Processor. TheMPX  
G2 works with any amp, from combo to stack, allowing you to place authentic  
effects anywhere in the signal chain without altering the amps basic tone. Two  
separate signal paths allow you to place effects where you want them. For  
example compression, wah and analog overdrive can be placed in front of the  
amp, while other effects, like delay chorus and reverb might be placed in the  
amps effect loop.  
Effect buttons light to show you  
which are active in any program.  
Push any lighted effect button to  
instantly bypass the effect. Press it  
again to turn the effect back on.  
Dynamic Gain™, Lexicon’s new analog distortion technology provides scream-  
ing overdrive and warm distortion tones which can be used as an analog stomp  
box in front of your amp or as a stand alone preamp for direct recording or live  
performance.  
Database Sorting Options  
Seven primary effect types: Gain, Effect 1, Effect 2, Chorus, Delay, EQ and,  
Reverb give you push button access to 76 effects, including extraordinary  
recreations of classics like the Uni-Vibe®, Dyna-Comp®, Phase 90®, Vox® and  
Cry Baby® wah, intelligent pitch shift, a JamMan™ style looper with 20-second  
full bandwidth delays, Chorus, Flanger, Sweepfilter, Detuner, Rotary Speaker,  
Parametric EQ and Tremolo.  
Sort selections by:  
name  
number  
Guitar Style:  
Bass  
Blues  
Clean  
Country  
Jazz  
Rock  
Effect type:  
Chorus  
The preset library is organized under database control to allow you to quickly  
find programs designed for specific styles such as Rock, or Blues, to find all of  
the programs using certain effects such as Overdrive, or to find only programs  
suitable for Stand Alone operation.  
Delay  
Distortion  
EQ  
Visual feedback is available every step of the way when you're using the  
MPX G2, with lighted buttons indicating the state of the unit and alerting you to  
extra features available from the front panel. A large numeric display shows  
program (and patch) numbers. A second alphanumeric display shows you  
program and parameter names and settings.  
Flanger  
Gain  
Mod  
Overdrive  
Phaser  
Pitch  
Reverb  
SpkrSim  
Wah  
All  
Like all Lexicon processors, the MPX G2 gives you as much depth of control as  
you're ever likely to want, while keeping the details out of your way. Surface  
control of the MPX G2 is straightforward and intuitive, with the most useful  
parameters of every program available from adedicatedSoft Row button onthe  
front panel.  
App type:  
StndAlne  
Amp In  
FX Loop  
members of MIDI maps  
members of pgm chains  
last 10 programs loaded  
The MPX G2 gives you tap tempo control when you want it. You can assign  
tempocontroltomodulationrates, delaytimesor anyeffectparameter,ensuring  
that your effects are in tempowithyour music. Tempos canbetappedin withthe  
front panel Tap button (or an assigned controller) or “dialed-in”, in BPM (beats  
per minute) on the display. The MPX G2 also lets you generate MIDI clock from  
your tempo, as well as receive MIDI tempo from an external sequencer or drum  
machine. Many presets have delay times assigned to Tap tempo. When you  
loadatempodrivenprogram, thefront panelTempo LED will flashatthecurrent  
tempo to let you know the Tap button is active. Press Tap twice in rhythm to  
change tempo.  
The Tempo light will flash in tempo  
whenever the Tap button is active.  
Press Tap twice in rhythm to match  
the tempo of effects to your music.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AnA/B glidefunctionisalsoavailablefromthefrontpanelandofcoursewe've  
designedpresets toshow this functionofftoits fullest. Whenever the A orB LED  
is lit, press the A/B button to activate the glide.  
When you want to create your own versions, you'll find A/B available as an  
internal controller in Edit mode along with two LFOs, an Envelope, and more.  
The A or B LED will light whenever a  
program with A/B Glide is loaded.  
Press A/B to activate a parameter  
glide whenever these lights are lit.  
Complete editing control is provided under the Edit button, where you can  
customize presets or make new ones from scratch, design your own soft row  
parameters, copy effects into new programs, and put effects in any sequence  
or routing configuration you want. Easy access to all of the parameters of any  
effect is just a button push away.  
All of the front panel functions (Tap, A/B, Effect selection, etc.) can easily be  
connected to MIDI controllers, footswitches, or footpedals, letting you set up all  
of the functions the way you want them.  
any features  
are brought out under  
the Options button – which  
will light whenever options are  
available.  
About the manual  
TogetthemostoutoftheMPXG2,wesuggestthat youinvestthetimetoexplore  
this manual. We think you’ll agree that the time spent investigating will reward  
you with enjoyment of its full capabilities.  
To get off to a quick start, turn directly to Chapter 1 Product Overview and  
Chapter 2 Basic Operation. The first section provides button definitions and  
necessary information for setting audio levels and connecting to other equip-  
ment. The second will tell you everything you need to know about loading and  
playing with programs.  
When you want to know more, check out the Table of Contents. We've divided  
topics into many easy to read (or skip) chapters so that you can find what you  
need without wading through what you don't.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Product Overview  
The Front Panel  
Program*  
Activates Program Mode where you can  
select and load programsand see which  
effects are active in any program.  
*In Autoload (default),  
displayed programs  
load automatically. In  
Manual mode, press  
Program to load any  
displayed program.  
Options  
Input/Output  
LED lights to indicate op-  
tions exist for the displayed  
parameter. Press to access  
options. (LED will flash  
while options are dis-  
played.) Press again to exit.  
Dual-function knob  
controls input and out-  
put levels.  
Level and Clip LEDs  
indicate presence of  
signal and overload  
(input signal greater  
than -0.1dB).  
Effect Select: Gain, Effect1, Effect2,  
Chorus, Delay, Reverb, EQ  
Buttons light to indicate effect is active. In  
Program mode, pressing button turns off LED  
and bypasses effect. In Edit mode, pressing  
button selects effect parameters for editing.  
InProgrammode, accesses  
DataBase sorting selection.  
Edit  
Soft Row  
Activates Edit  
mode for access  
to all parameters  
of the currently  
loaded effect.  
Guitar  
Press at any time for  
instant access to key  
editing parameters for  
the current program.  
Guitar input.  
(o ve r rid e s  
rear panel in-  
put.)  
Tap  
When Tempo LED is flashing, sets tempo.  
Press twice in rhythm to establish tempo  
rate. Press once to reset LFO.  
Power  
On/Off.  
A/B  
Low, Mid, High  
Bass, midrange and treble gain controls for  
the Gain effect in the current program.  
Activates a variable glide be-  
tween patched parameters.  
Store  
Initiates program  
store function.  
Insert  
Activates or bypasses  
the Insert.  
Display  
Aux In LED lights to indicate presence of signal at the  
Aux Input. The green Clip LED lights to indicate over-  
load at the Aux Input. The MIDI LED lights to indicate  
incoming or outgoing MIDI data.  
System  
Activates System mode  
parameterssuch asauto or  
manual load, MIDI dumps,  
I/O configuration, etc.  
Bypass  
Bypasses currently loaded  
program. When held, activates  
the built-in tuner.  
3-Digit Display indicatesID number of currentlyloaded  
program, patch or tuner value.  
Two rows of 16 characters display program and effect  
names, parameter names and values, help and alert  
messages and tuner information. An edit indicator  
shows edited effects.  
Knob and < >  
Knob selects programs, <and > adjust  
the displayed parameter's value and  
enter Yes and No responses to screen  
queries.  
Tempo LED flashes in time with current tempo rate  
when Tap is active.  
A/B LEDs light to indicate A/B function is active.  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
The Rear Panel  
MIDI  
IN  
Insert Returns (from Preamp)  
When connected, external audio will  
be inserted after the Gain block.  
7-pin DIN connector for MIDI IN or  
powered bidirectional MIDI remote.  
THRU  
Insert Send (to Preamp)  
5-pin DIN connector passes any  
MIDI data received without change.  
When the Insert Returns  
are connected, all effects  
before (and including) the  
Gain block will be passed  
to this connector.  
Insert Returns Level  
Controls the input level  
of the Insert Returns.  
OUT  
Guitar Input  
Guitar input (overridden by  
front panel input.)  
5-pin DIN connector transmits MIDI  
data to other equipment.  
Phones  
Headphone input.  
Foot Pedal  
Main Outputs (to Power Amp or  
Console)  
XLRand1/4"TRS:Outputimpedance  
is 600, each side, balanced, and  
levels up to +18dBu maximum full  
scale.  
REMOTE POWER IN  
2.5mm connector for 9  
VAC MIDI remote power.  
1/4" Tip/Ring/Sleeve  
phone jack provided for  
footpedal with 10kto  
100kimpedance.  
AC Power  
Standard 3-pin IEC power connector.  
100-240V, 50-60Hz automatic switching  
to correct voltage range.  
Unbalanced output levels up to  
+21dBu into 100k.  
Foot Switch  
1/4" Tip/Ring/Sleeve phone  
jack for three independent  
footswitches.  
For controlvoltage input, use a 1/4" stereo plug with Sleeve connected  
to ground, Tip connected to the controlvoltage, and Ring unconnected.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pro d uc t Ove rvie w  
Installation Notes  
The MPX G2 uses one EIA-standard rack space, and can be mounted on any  
level surface or in a standard 19 inch (483 mm) rack. If the unit is mounted in a  
rack or road case, support the rear of the chassis to prevent possible damage  
from mechanical shock and vibration.  
Mounting  
The maximum ambient operating temperature is 104°F (40°C). Provide ade-  
quate ventilation if the unit is mounted in a closed rack with heat-producing  
equipment such as power amplifiers.  
Power Requirements  
The MPX G2 is equipped with a 3-pin IEC power connector and detachable  
cord. The unit will operate with power sources from 100 to 240 volts AC, 50-  
60Hz. Power switching to actual line voltage is automatic.  
You’re here because you want to play with the MPX G2 RIGHT NOW. Plenty of  
time to read the manual later right?  
Quick Start  
Reset the MPX G2 to its  
factory settings  
(User programs are not affected.)  
OK. First things first. If the MPXG2 isn’t freshoutof thebox, let’s make sure that  
all of the internal parameters are set to their original factory settings. (This won’t  
affect any user programs.)  
1. Press System twice.  
2. Use the knob to select Initialize.  
3. Press > to display All.  
ress System twice.  
4. Use the knob to select System Only.  
5. Press Store.  
Use the knob to  
select Initialize.  
6. The display will show: Are you sure?/Yes or No.  
7. Press Yes.  
What happens next depends on how you want to connect and use the MPX G2.  
Setups for of the three basic configurations is covered in the following pages.  
ess > to select All.  
• Stand Alone: connected directly to headphones, mixer or power amp  
• Amp Input Only: connected to a guitar amp that does not have an effects loop  
Usetheknobtoselect  
System Only.  
• Amp Input & FX Loop: connected to a guitar amp that has a mono or stereo  
effects loop  
Each application has its own set of programs — so be sure to listen to the  
programs that match the application.  
Press Store.  
ess Yes in response  
the display prompt..  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Stand Alone:  
1. Turn the front panel Output control all the way down  
Direct connection to  
headphones, mixer or  
power amp  
2. Connect the Left and Right outputs to two input channels of your mixer or  
power amp  
OR  
Connect a pair of stereo headphones to the rear panel Phones jack  
Use with  
Programs 150-250  
3. Connect your guitar to the MPX G2 front panel Guitar input  
4. Set the MPX G2 front panel Input knob to 2 o’clock.  
5. Select your guitar’s most powerful pickup, turn the guitar volume control up  
all the way and play your loudest.  
6. WatchtheLevelandClipLEDs abovetheMPXG2Input/Outputknob. Ifthe  
redClip LED comes onmore thanjustoccasionally duringyour very loudest  
playing, back off the Input knob a bit. (With some guitars, the red LED may  
never come onthat’s OK.) Now that you’ve got the Inputknob setfor your  
loudestplaying, feel freetochangethecontrols ofyour guitar toany settings  
you like as you audition the MPX G2.  
7. While playing, slowly turn up the front panel Output knob until you reach a  
comfortable listening level. (You will hear a slight ticking as this knob is  
adjusted — this is normal.)  
Now you’re ready to start listening to the Stand Alone programs (150-250).  
Front Panel  
Turn Output to a comfortable  
listening level.  
Turn Input to 2 o'clock.  
Rear Panel  
OR  
to stereo headphones  
to Left and Right inputs of a  
mixer or power amp  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pro d uc t Ove rvie w  
1. Load MPX G2 program 249 Unity Gain.  
Amp Input Only:  
2. Plug your guitar directly into your amp and set the guitar volume to a  
comfortable listening level.  
Connection to a guitar  
amp that doesn’t have an  
effects loop  
3. Put your amp on standby — or turn it off.  
4. Unplugyour guitar from theamp andconnect theMPX G2rear panel Send  
jack to the input of your guitar amp.  
Use with  
Programs 100-149  
5. Connect your guitar to the MPX G2 front panel Guitar input.  
6. Set the MPX G2 front panel Input knob to 2 o’clock.  
7. Select your guitar’s most powerful pickup, turn theguitar volume control up  
all the way and play your loudest.  
8. Watch the Level and Clip LEDs above the MPX G2 Input/Output knob. If  
the red Clip LED comes on more than just occasionally during your very  
loudest playing, back off the Input knob a bit. (With some guitars, the red  
LED may never come on — that’s OK.) Now that you’ve got the Input knob  
set for your loudest playing, feel free to change the controls of your guitar  
to any settings you like as you audition the MPX G2.  
9.  
Press Bypass to bypass the program. (The Bypass LED will turn on.)  
10 Take your amp out of standby (or turn it on) and play. The volume and tone  
oftheguitar shouldbethesame aswhenyouwerepluggeddirectly intothe  
amp, thanks to the MPX G2 built-in relay bypass.  
11. Press Bypass again to make the program active. (The Bypass LED will  
turnoff). Playandcomparethislevel withthebypassedleveltheyshould  
be very close.  
12. With the program active, adjust the position of the MPX G2 Input knob to  
match the bypassed loudness.  
Now you’re ready to start listening to the Amp Input Only programs (100-149).  
Front Panel  
Turn Input to 2 o'clock.  
Rear Panel  
The Output control is unnecessary  
when the MPX G2 is used with an amp  
that doesn't have an effects loop.  
to the guitar amp Input  
(the same input you would  
use to plug in your guitar)  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
This is a bit more detailed than Stand alone or Amp Input Only setup — you’ll  
be connecting the MPX G2 to both sides of your guitar amp’s preamp section.  
Care must be taken to match levels on both sides of the preamp properly so the  
tone of your amp is not affected. By the way, as this setup involves making  
connectionsandchangingcontrols onboththefront andrear oftheMPXG2and  
your amp, as well as playing, it might be helpful to have someone help you out  
with this.  
Amp Input & FX Loop:  
Connection to a guitar  
amp with a mono or  
stereo effects loop  
Use with  
Programs 1-99  
If your guitar amp has a stereo effects loop, skip ahead to Part 1. If your guitar  
amp has a mono effects loop, set the MPX G2 Main Outputs for mono as  
follows:  
1. Press System twice to display System select: Audio.  
2. Press > to select Audio Output Mode.  
Seting the MPX G2  
3. Turn the knob to change the setting from Stereo to Mono.  
4. That’s it! Press Program to return to Program mode  
Main Outputs to Mono  
(for guitar amps with a mono  
effects loop)  
Part 1: Setting up the Pre Gain Path (connecting to the amp input)  
1. Load MPX G2 program 249 Unity Gain.  
2. Plug your guitar directly into your amp and set the guitar volume to a  
comfortable listening level.  
ress System twice.  
3. Put your amp on standby — or turn it off.  
4. Unplugyour guitar from theamp andconnect theMPX G2rear panel Send  
jack to the input of your guitar amp.  
5. Connect your guitar to the MPX G2 front panel Guitar input.  
6. Set the MPX G2 front panel Input knob to 2 o’clock.  
ess > to select  
dio Output Mode.  
7. Select your guitar’s most powerful pickup, turn theguitar volume control up  
all the way and play your loudest.  
8. Watch the Level and Clip LEDs above the MPX G2 Input/Output knob. If  
the red Clip LED comes on more than just occasionally during your very  
loudest playing, back off the Input knob a bit. (With some guitars, the red  
LED may never come on — that’s OK.)  
Use the knob to  
change the setting  
fromStereo toMono.  
Now that you’ve got the Input knob set for your loudest playing, feel free to  
change the controls of your guitar to any settings you like as you audition  
the MPX G2.  
Press Program to return  
to Program Mode.  
9.  
Press Bypass to bypass the program. (The Bypass LED will turn on.)  
10 Take your amp out of standby (or turn it on) and play. The volume and tone  
oftheguitar shouldbethesame aswhenyouwerepluggeddirectly intothe  
amp, thanks to the MPX G2 built-in relay bypass.  
11. Press Bypass again to make the program active. (The Bypass LED will  
turnoff). Playandcomparethislevel withthebypassedleveltheyshould  
be very close.  
12. With the program active, adjust the position of the MPX G2 Input knob to  
match the bypassed loudness.  
Part 2: Setting up the Post Gain Path (connecting to the amp effects loop)  
1. Put your amp on standby — or turn it off.  
2. Turn the MPX G2 front panel Output knob down all the way.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pro d uc t Ove rvie w  
3. Connect the amp’s effects loop send to the MPX G2 rear panel Insert  
Returnsjacks.(Notethatwhenyoumakethisconnection,theMPXG2front  
panel Insert button lights up to indicate something is connected to the  
Insert Returns.)  
4. If your amp has a mono effects loop...  
connect the amp’s loop send to the MPX G2 rear panel Right (Mono)  
Insert Return jack.  
If your amp has a stereo effects loop...  
connect the amp’s left and right effects loop sends to the MPX G2 rear  
panel Left and Right Insert Returns.  
NOTE: To get the output level ex-  
actly right, you need to compare  
the volume of the amp with its  
effects loop disconnected, to its  
volume with its effect loop con-  
nected. Here’s where an extra  
pair of hands can be very helpful.  
Load Program 249 Unity Gain.  
While you play, have someone  
else unplug the effects loop con-  
nections from the amp. Listen to  
the loudness of the sound, then  
have the loop plugged back in.  
5. Connect the MPX G2 rear panel Main Outputs to the effects loop returns  
of your amp. (If your amp has a mono effects loop, you can connect to  
either the MPX G2 Left or Right Main Output jack.)  
6. Set the MPX G2 rear panel Insert Level knob to 0.  
7. Take your amp out of standby (or turn it on).  
8. With program 249UnityGainstill loaded, playyour guitar. (Youwon’t hear  
anythingyet.) Slowly turn uptheMPXG2rearpanelLevel knob. (TheMPX  
G2front panelAuxInLEDshouldlight toshowthat youhavesignal coming  
into the Insert Returns.) Continue increasing Level until the MPX G2 front  
panel Clip LED only lights occassionally during your very loudest playing.  
9. Slowly turn up the MPX G2 front panel Output knob until the amp is back  
at its original loudness. (For most amps, this will be at about the 2 o’clock  
position.) You will hear a slight ticking as this knob is adjusted — this is  
normal.  
If the amp is louder with the loop  
connected, turn down the MPX  
G2 front panel Output knob.  
If the amp is softer with the loop  
connected, turn up the Output  
knob. Repeat this until you can’t  
hear any volume difference with  
the loop connected or not.  
Note the positions of the MPX G2 front panel Output knob as well as the  
postitionoftherearpanel Level knob.Theseshouldbethesame whenever  
you connect to this particular amp.  
OK, that's it! Now you’re ready to start listening to the Amp Input & FX Loop  
programs (1-99).  
Set both Input and  
Output to 2 o'clock.  
(See instructions.)  
ect Returns  
use to plug in  
your guitar)  
ht Main Out-  
put to a guitar amp with a mono effects  
loop. (See instructions for setting MPX G2  
Audio Output Mode to Mono.)  
from guitar amp  
effects loop Send  
Adjust Level so that the  
Clip LED does not light.  
(See instructions.)  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Connecting Other  
Equipment  
Footswitch/Footpedal  
One 1/4 inch T/R/S phone jack is provided for 3 momentary footswitches.  
Another 1/4 inch T/R/S phone jack is provided for a footpedal (minimum 10k to  
maximum 100k impedance). Normally open or normally closed momentary  
switches are suitable. At power on, the MPX G2 assumes the switch is off. Use  
shielded, twisted-pair cable with shield connected to sleeve. See diagram on  
previous page. See also Chapter 5: System Controls for information on pedal  
calibration.  
MIDI  
5-pin DIN connectors are provided for MIDI THRU and OUT. A 7-pin DIN  
connectorisprovidedforMIDIINorapoweredremote. Usestandard MIDIcable  
assemblies, available from your local dealer.  
Connecting to an MPX R1  
When an MPX R1 is connected to an MPX G2, two-way communication is  
accomplished via MIDI System Exclusive messages. This allows immediate  
response by both units to actions on either front panel.  
Connect the power adapter provided with the MPX R1 to theMPX G2 REMOTE  
POWER input jack and to a wall outlet.  
Power up the MPX G2 and connect the 7-pin DIN cable provided with the  
MPX R1 between the MPX G2 rear panel IN/REMOTE jack and the MPX R1  
MIDI OUT/REMOTE.  
The MPX R1 will cycle through a power-up routine, lighting various LEDs, and  
thendisplayCon.TheMPXG2willdisplayRemoteDetected.Thesemessages  
indicate that proper bidirectional control has been established.  
Relay  
(Amp Channel Select)  
Foot Pedal  
7-pin DIN  
Foot  
Switch  
Cable  
to AC Power  
Source  
to Lexicon  
MSA Adapter  
Connect a 7-pin DIN cable between the MPX (1 or G2) and the MPX R1.  
Connect the MPX (1 or G2) to the MSA adapter provided with the MPX R1.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pro d uc t Ove rvie w  
Effect 2  
EQ  
Pedal Wah2  
Volume (M)  
Volume (S)  
Volume (D)  
PedalVol  
ExtPedalVol  
Test Tone  
Click  
Panner  
BlueComp  
DigiDrive1  
DigiDrive2  
OctaBuzz  
SweepFilter  
1-Band (M)  
Wah 1  
Auto Pan  
Tremolo (M)  
Tremolo (S)  
UniVybe  
CustomVybe  
Phaser  
1-Band (M)  
2-Band (M)  
3-Band (M)  
4-Band (M)  
1-Band (S)  
2-Band (S)  
1-Band (D)  
2-Band (D)  
Fc Splitter  
Crossover  
Volume (M)  
Volume (S)  
Volume (D)  
PedalVol  
Reverb  
Chamber  
Hall  
Plate  
Ambience  
Gate  
OrangePhase Wah 2  
RedComp  
ExtPedalVol  
Pedal Wah1  
Chorus  
Delay  
Effect 1  
Gain  
Chorus  
Tone  
Crunch  
Screamer  
Overdrive  
Distortion  
Preamp  
Detune (M)  
Detune (S)  
Detune (D)  
Shift (M)  
Shift (S)  
Shift (D)  
DiatonicHmy DigiDrive1  
Panner  
Auto Pan  
Tremolo (M)  
Tremolo (S)  
UniVybe  
CustomVybe  
Phaser  
OrangePhase Pedal Wah2  
RedComp  
BlueComp  
Wah 1  
Wah 2  
Pedal Wah1  
Delay (M)  
Delay (S)  
Delay (D)  
Echo (M)  
Echo (S)  
Echo (D)  
Looper  
Detune (M)  
Flanger (M)  
Flanger24 (M)  
Flanger (S)  
Rotary Cab  
Aerosol  
Volume (M)  
Volume (S)  
Volume (D)  
PedalVol  
ExtPedalVol  
Test Tone  
Click  
SplitPreamp  
Orbits  
DigiDrive2  
OctaBuzz  
SweepFilter  
1-Band (M)  
JamMan  
Ducker  
Centrifuge1  
Centrifuge2  
Comb 1  
Comb 2  
Volume (M)  
Volume (S)  
Volume (D)  
PedalVol  
Connecting an MPX R1 to the MPX G2 gives you  
stomp-box control of all of the MPX G2 effects.  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Following are diagrams showing signal flow in the MPX G2 Pre-Gain and Post-  
Gain paths. When combined, these two diagrams show the entire signal path  
between your guitar and the Main Outputs when the MPX G2 is used as a  
standalone processor. Depending on which effects are active in a given  
program (and where they are placed), the MPX G2 will automatically route  
around unnecessary analog circuits as well as A/D and D/A converters. This  
allows signal-to-noise and dynamic range to be optimized for every program.  
Signal Flow  
Effect 1, Effect 2, Chorus, Delay, Reverb and EQ can be placed in any  
combination on either, or both, pre gain and post gain paths.  
Pre-Gain Path  
This is the signal flow between your guitar and amp when Insert Send is  
connected to the input of the guitar amp (pre gain path). The “straight-wire”  
bypasspathandautomatic bypass relayfunctionasaneffect loopswitcher. The  
analognoisegatewillhelp keepnoiseundercontrolwhenyouuseeffectsinfront  
of your amp’s high-gain channel.  
Post-Gain Path  
This is the effects loop processing path when the Insert Returns are connected  
to your amp’s effects loop sends (post gain path). The built-in Insert Router and  
Digital Router automatically configure the signal flow based on which connec-  
tions and settings you’re using. The stereo noise gate can reduce stage levels  
to near silence when you stop playing - without muting the tails of post gain  
effects like delays or reverbs.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pro d uc t Ove rvie w  
The MPX G2 is a complete guitar processing system. As such it has two  
independent audio paths: one for effects that go directly between the guitar and  
the input to the amp (pre-gain path), the other for effects that are inserted in the  
amp’s effects loop (post-gain path). Analog Dynamic Gain effects (Tone,  
Crunch, Screamer, Distortion, and Preamp) are dedicated to the pre-gain path.  
The other 70 effects can be placed anywhere on either path and each one of  
the 300 MPX G2 programs can have its own unique combination of effects,  
distributed on either path.  
Dual Audio Paths  
Whendifferent pieces ofaudiogear are connectedtogether, care mustbetaken  
toavoid groundloops (whichcancause noise and hum problems). TheMPXG2  
uses a special grounding scheme to safely minimize grounding-related prob-  
lems. All circuits are internally connectedtoacommongroundplane. (This isthe  
same approach used to ground racks of gear in studio installations and touring  
rigs.) The chassis is isolated from the printed circuit board to prevent ground  
loops through the ground pin of the AC cord. No special cables are required  
when connecting the MPX G2 to other equipment.  
Internal Grounding  
Note that the G2 must always be properly grounded via the ground pin in its AC  
line cord.  
With the exception of the Main Outputs and the stereo Headphone connectors,  
all ofthe1/4" connectors are unbalancedmonojacks. For best performance use  
high-quality, shielded instrument cables.  
Unbalanced  
Connections  
The MPX G2 has two high impedance guitar inputs: one on the front panel and  
another on the rear panel. Connecting to the front panel input will override a  
connection made at the rear panel input.  
Guitar Input  
For best performance, maintain balanced connections, and use high-quality,  
low-capacitance, shielded twisted-pair cable. Use shielded instrument cables  
for unbalanced connections.  
Main Outputs  
When connecting the MPX G2 XLR outputs to single-ended, unbalanced  
devices, leave the low side floating and connect the grounds between the  
units.  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
TheMPX G2Insert Sendis alwaysactive. WhenGain is on, its signal is from the  
Gain block output. When Gain is bypassed, or when no Gain effect is in the  
program, its signal is from the Gain block input. Note that this signal passes  
throughaprogrammablelevelcontrol(Edit mode:Mix:SendLevel)andanalog  
noise gate before leaving the unit via the Insert Send jack. Note also that  
whenever there are no active effects between the guitar input and the Insert  
Send, a relay automatically switches in a “straight-wire” bypass path. This  
ensures that there is nothing between your guitar and your amp unless one or  
morepre-gaineffectsareactive.(UntiltheMPXG2,theonlyway togetthissame  
kind of analog purity when using effects was to install a dedicated effects loop  
switching unit.)  
Insert Send  
Inserting a jack into either (or both) Insert Return connectors breaks the  
normalled connections between pre-gain and post-gain paths, allowing you to  
insert an external device (guitar preamp, effects processor, etc.) into the MPX  
G2signal path. Whenanexternal device is inserted, thefront panel Insert button  
LED will light.  
Insert Returns  
The external device can be bypassed by pressing Insert (its LED will go out).  
When the MPX G2 is connected to an amp’s effects loop, you can usethe Insert  
button to bypass the amp’s preamp and send MPX G2 signals directly into the  
amp’s power amp. This feature allows you, for example, to switch between your  
amp’s high-gain channel and an MPX G2 Gain effect clean channel.  
TheInsertReturnjackshavesoftware-controlledsensingandswitchingcircuitry  
to automatically route signals depending on which jacks are used and the MPX  
G2 bypass state.  
Automatic  
Insert Return  
Signal Routing  
When only the Right Insert Return is connected, its signal is split and sent into  
boththeleft andrightchannels ofthepost-gain path. Whentheunit is bypassed,  
the dry Insert signal will be present at both outputs.  
Right (Mono) Only  
When both Left and Right Insert Returns are connected, their signals are sent  
in stereo to the left and right channels of the post-gain path. When the unit is  
bypassed, the dry stereo signal is present at the outputs.  
Stereo  
When only the Left Insert Return is connected, its signal is sent only to the left  
channel of the post-gain path. The right channel of the post gain path is  
“normalled” to the right channel of the pre gain path. When the unit is bypassed,  
the dry Insert signal is present on the left output and the Guitar Input signal is  
present on the right output.  
Left Only  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pro d uc t Ove rvie w  
TheMPX G2Main Outputsare setto stereoat thefactory. Whenconnectingthe  
MPX G2 to an external device with a mono input (such as a mono effects loop  
return), set the Main Outputs for mono as follows:  
Connecting  
the Main Outputs  
to Mono Input  
1.Press System twice. The display will show System select: Audio.  
2.Press > to select Audio OutputMode.  
3.Turn the knob to change the setting from Stereo to Mono.  
4.Press Program to return to Program mode.  
The MPX G2 is factory set to produce unity gain when the front panel Input and  
Outputcontrols are setto 2o’clock, and theInput Clip and Aux InClip LEDs only  
comeonbriefly duringyour veryloudestplaying(ifatall).(SeeQuickStartearlier  
in this chapter for detailed instructions on setting levels.)  
Setting Audio Levels  
Using Soft Sat  
Soft Sat is a built-in analog limiter that precedes the A/D converters in the MPX  
G2. If the source to the MPX G2 is "hot", you can use Soft Sat to reduce the  
harshnesscausedbyoverloadingtheA/D converters. PressSystem, selectthe  
Audio menu, then select Soft Sat to turn the limiter On or Off.  
ThegreenLevel LED indicatessignal presence(above-30dB) ateither thefront  
orrear panelguitarinputs. TheredClipLED indicatesoverloadateither ofthese  
inputs, or overload of any effect in the pre-gain path.  
Input Level and Clip  
Indicators  
The Aux In LED indicates signal presence at either of the two Insert Return  
jacks. The Aux In — ClipLED indicates overload of either ofthe Insert Returns,  
or overload of any effect in the post-gain path.  
Aux In and Clip  
Indicators  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Beginningwithamenutreetoguideyouthroughthemajor areasoftheMPXG2,  
this chapter focusesonthe basics that youwanttoget tofirst — finding, loading,  
tweaking and storing programs.  
Basic Operation  
MPX G2 Menus  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Pressing the front panel Program button accesses the MPX G2 library of 300  
presets and user programs. In this mode, you can select and load programs,  
select database sorting criteria and access the "Soft Row" — a selected set of  
the most useful parameters for each program. You can also access Tap, A/B,  
Mix and Patch functions, as well as selecting and bypassing effects in the  
program. Each of these is described in this section.  
Loading and Playing  
with Programs  
When loading programs, the knob  
selects programs. The < and >  
buttons jump to the next DataBase  
sorting category.  
Program Load  
When you press the Program button, its LED will light to let you know you're in  
Program mode.  
Auto Load  
When first shipped, the MPX G2 will default to automatic program load, with all  
of the programs available in numerical order from 1 to 300. The top line of the  
display will show the DataBase sorting option "Sorted by number". The bottom  
lineofthedisplaywillshow aprogram name.Thelargenumericdisplaywillshow  
the ID number of the displayed program.  
essandholdthe Pro-  
am button to display  
the name and number of  
the currently running program  
while another program is displayed.  
If the displayed program is currently  
loaded, pressing and holding Pro-  
gram will display the effect routing  
assignment.  
Turn the knob to display and load other programs. An asterisk () will appear  
briefly before each program name before it loads.  
Manual Load  
To switch to manual program load, press System. Use the knob to select  
Modes, then use the < and > buttons to display:  
Modes: Pgm Load  
< >  
Auto  
Turn theknob toselect Manual. Inthis mode, anasterisk () before the program  
name indicates that the displayed program is not loaded, and the flashing  
Program button LED indicates that the program is cued for loading when  
Program is pressed. (When the currently loaded program is selected, the  
Program button LED will light steadily, and there will be no asterisk in the  
display.)  
In Manual Load, press the flash-  
ing Program button to load the  
displayed program.  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ba sic Op e ra tio n  
The front panel Effect buttons light to show you which effect blocks are active.  
— When you're scrolling through programs, they'll change to show you the  
effects in any displayed program. Once you stop scrolling, they'll return to  
display of the effects that are active in the currently loaded program.  
Effect Bypass  
To bypass any active effect, press its button. The light will turn off and the effect  
will be bypassed. Press the button again to make the effect active again.  
The active effects of the currently  
loaded program are lighted. Press  
any lighted button to turn the effect  
off.Pressit againto maketheeffect  
active again.  
Press and hold down any effect button to display the name of the effect and  
information about its status in the program (on or off).  
External audio gear (guitar preamp, CD player, etc) can be inserted into the  
MPXG2audiopath via therear panel Insert Return jacks. Thefront panel Insert  
button will light to show you when this connection is active.  
Insert Bypass  
To bypass this external connection, press Insert. The LED will turn off and the  
inserted gear will be bypassed. Press Insert again to make the inserted gear  
active again.  
Press the lighted  
Insert button to  
bypass devices  
When the MPX G2 leaves the factory, Insert connections are routed in series  
between the pre-gain and post-gain paths. (This is the best routing to use when  
connecting to amplifier effects loops.) You can alter this routing by changing the  
setting of the Insert parameter in the System: Modes menu. Be sure to read  
about the three different Insert Modes (FX Loop, Mix and Parallel) in Chapter 5:  
System Controls.  
connected at the MPX G2 Insert  
Return jacks.  
NOTE: When the MPX G2 is connected to a guitar amp with an effects loop, the  
Insertbuttonallowsyoutoswitchtheguitaramp’spreampinandoutoftheaudio  
path. When it is out ofthe path, the guitar signal flows through the pre- and post-  
gain paths and then directly into the power amp. This allows you to switch  
between dramatically different tones with a single button push.  
The MPX G2 has three dedicated front panel tone controls which allow instant  
modification of the Low, Mid and High settings of the Dynamic Gain effect in the  
current program. These controls are analog pots. Changes made with these  
knobs take place immediately (You don’t have to pass-through the current  
value- once you move the knob, it “owns” the parameter.)  
Dedicated Analog  
Tone Controls  
When any of these controls is moved, the display will briefly show the current  
values ofall threecontrols, thenreturntothepreviousscreen. Changedsettings  
can be stored by pressing Store to initiate the Store procedure.  
Dedicated front panel tone con-  
trols allow instant modification of  
the Dynamic Gain effect in the  
current program.  
Be aware that in many of the Dynamic Gain effects, these tone controls interact  
with the analog distortion circuitry, increasing or decreasing the amount of  
distortion in Low, Mid and High frequency bands.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Programmable  
Bypass Modes  
As the MPX G2 is designed with separate pre-gain and post-gain effects paths,  
the master Bypass button can be progammed to function in a variety of useful  
ways. The factory setting is for both paths to be bypassed when Bypass is  
activated. You can choose, however, to have this button bypass only the pre-  
gain path, only the post-gain path or both paths.  
Bypass behavior for each path can be independently programmed as well. The  
pre-gain path can be set to Disabled or to provide an analog "straight wire"  
Bypass.  
The post-gain path can be set to Input Mute (delays and reverbs will "ring out"  
when bypassed), All Mute (no output when bypassed) or Bypass. When set to  
Bypass, the post-gain path has an optional Bypass Level parameter that  
allows you to set an independent level for when the post-gain path is bypassed.  
You can choose to have Bypass  
bypassthepre-gainpath,thepost-  
gain path, or both paths in System  
mode.  
(Be sure to read about SendBypass and PostBypass under System: Modes in  
Chapter 5: System Controls.)  
TheMPXG2hasabuilt-in chromatic tuner.To activatethe tuner, press andhold  
Bypass. When the tuning displays appear, release the button and play a note.  
The displays will show the name of the note you played, and also indicate how  
flat or sharp it is.  
Tuner  
+ - - - - - [ ❚ ❚ ] - - - - - +  
note= E  
When the MPX G2 is connected to  
an MPX R1 MIDI Remote Control-  
ler, the tunerisalso displayed on the  
MPX R1 numeric display.  
The note you play is shown on the display along  
with indicators to show whether the note issharp,  
flat, or in tune.  
When you’re finished tuning, press Bypass again to return to normal operation.  
When the Tuner is activated, the Insert Send and Main Outputs are automati-  
cally muted. Youcanchangethis behavior bychangingthesettingoftheTuning  
Bypass parameter in the System: Tuner Mode menu. (See Chapter 5: System  
Controls.)  
Tap  
MPXG2tempocontrols are availablerightonthefront panel throughtheTempo  
LED and the Tap button. Many preset programs are designed with their own  
tempo rate settings which are stored with the programs. The front panel Tempo  
LED will flash in tempo whenever you load a program with tempo control. This  
flashingindicates that the Tap buttonis active, allowing youtochangetempoon  
the fly. Whenever you see the Tempo light flashing, simply press Tap twice in  
rhythm to establish the rate you want.  
Flashing of the Tempo LED indi-  
cates that Tap is active. Press Tap  
twice in rhythmto change the tempo  
of delay or modulation parameters  
in the current program.  
You can override these individual tempo rates with a global tempo rate in the  
System Setup menu. Tempo is also available as an independent patch source  
which can control any effect parameter. (See Chapter 4: Patching and Chapter  
5: System Controls.)  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ba sic Op e ra tio n  
A/B is a unique glide function which allows you to "morph" between selected  
parameters. Most effect parameters (or groups of parameters) can be patched  
totheA/Bcontroller. Onceaparameter is patched, theA/Bcontrols in Edit mode  
allow you to select the rate at which you want to glide from A to B and from B to  
A when the front panel A/B button is pressed. You can also assign the glide  
function to be triggered by any internal source, such as input level, or by an  
internal or external controller.  
A/B  
Many of the presets are designed with A/B patches that allow you to morph  
between two effects, glide from slow to fast rotary speakers, start and stop loop  
delays, etc. Loading any program with A/Bcontrol assigned, will cause thefront  
panel A LED to light, indicating that the A/B function is active. Press A/B to  
activateaglidefromtheparameter valuesassignedtoAtotheparametervalues  
assigned to B. Press A/B again to glide back to the A parameter values. (When  
you want to change the A/B parameters, control A/B remotely, assign a trigger  
source, or alter the rate of glide, refer to Chapter 4: Patching and Chapter 8:  
MPX G2 Internal Controllers.)  
When A is lit, pressing the A/B but-  
ton activates a parameter glide.  
Pressing A/B again reverses the  
glide.  
TheMPXG2offersaccess tothemostusefulparametersofanyprogramwithout  
having to enter a separate Edit mode. These parameters are available at any  
time by pressing Soft Row.  
Soft Row Editing  
The upper line of the display will show the Effect type, the parameter name and  
the current parameter value. The lower line of the display will show the name of  
the program. Use the knob to change the parameter value. Use the < and >  
buttons to move back and forth between the available parameters. A scroll  
indicator in the lower left corner of the display tells you whether or not there are  
more parameters in either direction.  
Press Soft Row to  
accessa set of the most  
useful parameters for each pro-  
gram.  
Changes you make to parameters in the Soft Row will be saved only until you  
load another program unless you store your modified version of the program.  
See Program Store later in this section.  
Press Soft Row to access Soft Row parameters.  
The Effect type and the parameter name will  
appear on the upper line.  
Gain  
>
Drive  
25  
Scrollindicators(<and>)onthebottomof  
the screen point you in the direction of  
additional screens.  
The parameter value will flash in the lower  
right. Use the knob to change the param-  
eter value, use < and > to select another  
parameter screen.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
TheMPXG2hasadatabasesortingfunctionwhichallowsyoutosortandsearch  
forprograms invarious categories. Thisisagreattimesaverwhenyou'relooking  
specifically for guitar effects, or EQ effects, or for EQ effects for guitar. When  
shipped, the DataBase sorting option is set to "Sort by number", allowing you to  
use the knob to scroll through all of the 300 programs in numerical order in  
Program mode. (The < and > buttons will jump you forward and back ten  
programsatatime.Simultaneously pressing<and>jumpsfrom1to251or from  
251 to 1.)  
Using the DataBase  
In Program mode ...  
Youcanselect other sortingcriteriain Program mode bypressing Options. The  
Options LED will blink and the display will show:  
Sort programs  
by number  
Usetheknoborthe<and>buttonstoselectanyofthemainsortingoptionslisted  
below:  
... press Options to access the  
name  
number  
DataBase sorting options.  
guitar style  
(Acoustic, Bass, Blues, Clean, Country, Jazz, Rock)  
effect type  
(Chorus, Delay, Distortion, EQ, Flanger, Gain, Mod,  
Overdrive, Phaser, Pitch, Reverb, SpkrSim, Wah, All)  
application type  
(StndAlne, Amp In, FX Loop)  
members of MIDI maps  
members of pgm chains  
last 10 programs loaded  
Press Options again to return to Program mode with the database sorted to  
show only those programs that fit the criteria you've selected. If you select  
"name", the knob will scroll you through all 250 programs in alphabetical order  
(The < and > buttons will jump you forward and back through letters of the  
alphabet.)  
If youselectany sortingoptionother thansort bynameor number, thedisplayed  
selection of programs will be limited to those which fit the category. — We've  
made sure that all 250 of the factory programs are tagged for a variety of  
appropriate sorting options, so you'll find plenty to play with in each category.  
NOTE: MPX G2 programs have been designed for specific applications.  
Standalone programsmaynotsound rightif listened tothrough aguitar  
amp and vice versa.  
When you select guitar style, effect type or app type as an option and return to  
Program mode, the knob will scroll through the programs in the first of the  
categories listed in parenthesis above. The < and > buttons will jump to the next  
sorting category.  
Assigning guitar style, effect and app types to programs is done in a database  
menu in Edit Mode.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ba sic Op e ra tio n  
Once you've made changes to a program, such as turning an effect off, or  
modifying any of the soft row parameters, an edit indicator in the display (•) will  
appear in front of theprogram name. This identifies theprogram as havingbeen  
altered since the last store procedure. This edit indicator, along with all of your  
changes, will disappear when you load another program.  
Program Store  
To save your changes, press Store. The LED in the Store button will flash to let  
you know you are in the middle of a store procedure and the display will show:  
ess Store to  
tiate the store  
ocedure.  
Program Name  
251 available  
The Store LED will  
flash while you  
change the name of  
the program and de-  
cide where to store it.  
The upper line of the display shows the name of the currently running program.  
The lower line shows a user program number (251-300) and the name of the  
program currently stored there. (When the MPX G2 is shipped, the user  
programs are all "available".)  
The < and > buttons move an underbar cursor in the display from the program  
number to each letter of the current name. Turning the knob will select another  
programnumber,or willselectalphanumericcharacterswhenthecursorisinthe  
upper line of the display.  
Press the flashing Store button  
to verify your changes.  
Onceyou've madechangesto theprogram name or selecteda new locationfor  
it, press Store again. The display will show:  
Are you sure?  
Yes or No  
Thenumeric displaywill flashtheuser program number youhaveselectedwhile  
you decide to press > Yes or < No. Once you have stored your program, it will  
automatically be added to the database and you will return to Program Load  
mode.  
PressYes to complete the store.  
The following are stored with the program*:  
All effects and their settings  
Effect Order and Routing Map  
Bypass state of each effect  
Insert state (if jack(s) are plugged into Insert Return(s) when the program is  
stored)  
Master Bypass state of the program when it was stored  
Toe Switch setting (Option)  
Speaker Sim On/Off and Cabinet  
Noise Gate settings  
Tempo settings  
* This assumes that Reverb, Speaker Sim, Noise Gate, Tempo and/or Bypass modes are set to  
Program. Any of these that are set to Global, will not be stored.  
NOTE:If thestoredprogram nolongermeets theDataBasesortingcriteriaofthe  
original version, the MPX G2 will automatically switch the DataBase setting to  
"Sort by number".  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
This chapter describesall of theMPXG2 edit functions. As thefirst thingyouare  
likely to want to modify in a program are its effects, this section starts there and  
then moves on to all of the functions available in Edit mode.  
Editing  
Effect Editing  
To edit any effect,pressEdit, thenpress anEffect buttontoviewall oftheEffects  
ofthattype, andtoedittheparametersofthecurrentEffect.Thedisplaywillshow  
theEffect typeandthenameofthecurrentlyloadedEffect .Turn theknobtoview  
other Effects of the displayed type.  
This indicator shows that  
Options are available  
Knob scroll  
Number of processing  
steps used for this effect  
FX 1select:  
nn  
Arrow scroll  
>
Effect Name  
The Effect name will be marked with an asterisk () and the Effect button light  
will blink rapidly if the displayed effect can be loaded in the current program.  
(Press and hold the Effect button to display the name of the Effect currently in  
use.)  
An X appears in place of the asterisk if there are not enough DSP resources to  
load the effect. Two seconds after an algorithm is selected with the knob, the  
following screen will appear briefly, showing the number of resources available:  
number of processing  
steps remaining  
nn available  
XXX of 190 used  
Number of processing  
stepsused (including the  
currently running effect)  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
If there are not enough resources available to load the effect you want, another  
effect must be removed from the program to make resources available.  
Coarse and Fine Editing  
of ms and Hz values  
Parameters whose values are dis-  
played in ms or Hz have overall  
ranges of more than 1000 units.  
When you select one of these pa-  
rameters for editing, you’ll notice  
that either the left or right portions of  
thevaluecanbe selectedforediting.  
For quick, coarse adjustments, se-  
lect the left portion of the value. For  
fine adjustments, select the right  
portion of the value. The fine and  
coarse increments for each type of  
parameter are:  
To load any available Effect, press the Effect button again. The asterisk will  
disappear from the displayed name and the button light will return to its normal  
slow blinking edit state. An edit indicator is displayed to indicate that the active  
program has been modified.  
To edit the parameters of the current effect, press > . The display will show one  
or more parameters as shown below.  
An edit indicator appears in front of the  
parameter name if the value has been  
changed since the last store operation.  
ms (delay times)  
coarse increments=100 ms  
fine increments=1ms  
One or two parameters will be  
A patch indicator appears be-  
shown on each parameter screen.  
fore the parameter name if it is  
controlled by a patch.  
Hz (LFO rates)  
coarse increments=1 Hz  
fine increments=.01Hz  
Parameter values  
are shown on the  
bottom line of the  
display.  
The Effect type is  
shown in the upper  
left of the display.  
FX 1 P.Mix  
< > 100%  
Level  
0 dB  
Hz (EQ Fc)  
coarse increments=100 Hz  
fine increments=1Hz  
Effects with Rate and Depth, or  
other dynamic parameters,  
have animated meters here.  
Fields which are selected  
for changing will blink.  
The item on the lower line of the display which is selected for adjustment will  
flash. Turn the knob to scroll through the entire range of parameter values. Use  
the < and > buttons to select another parameter value field and to move to  
another parameter screen.  
DetailedinformationoneachEffect andits parameters is providedin Chapter 7.  
Press Edit to return to the main Edit menu.  
Effect Select Option: Toe Switch (when an MPX R1 is connected)  
When an MPX R1 MIDI Remote Controller is connected to theMPX G2, the Toe  
Switch option allows you to use the R1 Toe Switch to turn the effect you are  
editing on, to bypass it, or to specify that the Toe Switch have no effect.  
This powerful feature allows you to group different effects to be turned on or off  
whenever the MPX R1 Toe Switch is pressed. For example, set Wah for  
Off=Bypass and set Chorus for On=Bypass to switch between a Wah and  
Chorus whever the Toe Switch is pressed.  
PressOptionstosetthe  
MPX R1 Toe Switch to  
control Bypass  
of the effect, or  
to disable the  
Toe Switch.  
To assign aToe Switch functionto aneffect youare editing, press Options from  
the FX select: display. Use the knob to select On = Bypass, Off = Bypass or  
disabled. Once you have made your selection, press Options again to return  
to Effect Edit mode.  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ed iting  
TheMPXG2Edit menusgiveyouaccesstoallofthecontrolsyouneedto create  
your own programs. Whether you want to view the meter display, re-route the  
effects in a program, or create an entirely new sound, you will find the tools you  
need in this section.  
The MPX G2 Edit  
Menus  
The complete Edit mode menu structure is shown below, followed by detailed  
explanations of each main menu selection.  
Press Edit to enter the main Edit menu. Use the knob to select the particular  
submenu you want (Mix, Speaker Sim, etc.).  
Edit select:  
>
Mix  
Use the < and > buttons to enter the submenu and select parameters, and the  
knob to adjust parameter values. Press Edit again to return to the main Edit  
menu.  
Each of the Edit submenus is discussed in the following pages, in the order they  
appear in the Edit menu.  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Press Edit to enter the main Edit menu and use the knob to select Mix.  
Mix  
The display will show Mix and Level labels on the upper line, and the current  
settings on the lower line. One of the values on the lower line will be flashing to  
let you know which is selected for adjustment. Use the < and > buttons to select  
Send Level, Post Mix and Level, or to step to the Mix and Level controls for any  
activeeffect in thecurrently runningprogram. Usetheknobtoadjusttheflashing  
parameter value.  
Use > to step to the Level parameter, orto step forward  
to the next screen of Mix and Level parameters.  
Post  
< >  
Mix  
100% 0dB  
Level  
The knob will adjust the flashing parameter value.  
In the MPX G2, both the pre-gain and post-gain paths have independent  
programmable level controls. Be sure to read about MPX G2 signal flow in  
Chapter 1.  
Adjusting Pre-Gain and  
Post-Gain Level  
TheSendparameter controlsthelevelofthePre-Gainsignal leavingthroughthe  
rear panel Send jack. When the front panel Input knob is set correctly (with the  
Clip LED lighting only occasionally during your loudest playing), a Send Level  
of 0dB will match the level of the Unity Gain Relay Bypass.  
The main purpose of this control is to allow you to match the overall Pre-Gain  
effects level with the level when the Pre-Gain path is bypassed. It can also be  
used to provide clean boost to add additional punch to kick a clean amp into  
overdrive.  
Send Options: Send Byp Level  
This parameter controls the Send output level during the transition between two  
programs when a new program is loaded — to allow you to smooth out any  
volume differences that might occur during program load. For most programs  
this level should be set to 0dB.  
With the Send or Post  
parameter displayed,  
press Options to  
access Bypass  
Level.  
ThePost-Gainpathalsohas programmable effects andbypasslevels. ThePost  
Level parameter sets the overall level of wet (effects only) signal. It can add as  
much as 6dB of additional gain.  
Post Options: Post Byp Level  
This parameter sets the output level of the Post Gain path when it is bypassed.  
A setting of 0dB corresponds to unity gain.  
These parameters allow you to match Post-Gain effects and bypass levels so  
that transitions between bypass states and program loads will be smooth. For  
most programs the Post Byp Level should be set to 0dB and the Post Level  
parameter should be changed to match the bypass level.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ed iting  
The MPX G2 has a progammable analog speaker simulator which is located  
between the pre- and post-gain paths. When used as a stand alone processor,  
the speaker simulator is connected to the output of theMPX G2 analog preamp.  
Speaker Sim  
The speaker simulator can be set to Global or Program mode. When set to  
Global, the current speaker simulator settings will be active for all programs  
when they load. (This is a quick way to turn the speaker sim on or off for all  
programs.) When set to Program, each program will load with its own Speaker  
Sim settings.  
When the speaker simulator is active, a small speaker icon appears in the  
Program display.  
Be aware that the factory programs that use the speaker simulator were  
designed to sound best when the MPX G2 is used as a stand alone processor.  
These will sound overly dark if used through a guitar amp and speaker cabinet.  
(Just turn Speaker Sim off if you want listen to them through a guitar amp.)  
NOTE: You can use the simulator  
to processthe output of an external  
preamp by simply connecting the  
external preamp to the MPX G2  
Return jack(s). The speaker simu-  
lator is a mono circuit. When both  
returnsareused, theyare summed  
to mono within the speaker simula-  
tor.  
Likewise, factory programs that don’t use the speaker simulator will sound best  
throughaguitar amp. Programs that use again effect anddon’t usethespeaker  
simulator will sound harsh when you listento them directly through headphones  
or at a console. (Turn Speaker Sim on to listen to these programs direct.)  
There are 4 cabinet designs to choose from: Combo1, Combo2, Stack 1 and  
Stack 2.  
See diagrams on the following  
page.  
Combo 1 is an open-back cabinet with 10” speakers.  
Combo 2 is an open back cabinet with 12” speakers.  
Stack 1 is closed back with 12” speakers.  
Stack 2 is closed back with 10” speakers.  
Each cabinet can loaded with one of four speaker types: Bright, Normal, Warm,  
and Dark.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Automatic  
Speaker Sim Routing  
All routing to and from the Speaker  
Simulatorisautomatic,basedonwhich  
Insert Return jacks are used and  
whether or not Split Preamp is loaded  
into the Gain effect block.  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ed iting  
The MPX G2 has two integrated noise gates, one analog and one digital. Both  
are drivenbythedirectsignal. Thegatesshareacommonsetofparameters and  
can be used independently, or combined to create a “super gate”.  
Noise Gate  
The analog gate is the final output stage of the MPX G2 pre-gain Insert Send  
path.Thisallowsyoutogatetheanalogsignalconnectedtoyourguitaramp.The  
attack and release times of the analog gate are fixed (both are preset to be very  
fast).  
The digital gate is located on the post-gain path, immediately after the Insert  
Returns. This stereogateallows youtogatetheeffects Sendsignal comingfrom  
an external guitar preamp before it is processed by any post-gain effects such  
as reverb or delay. (This means that reverb and decay tails will ring out naturally  
when the gate shuts down.) The digital gate is driven by the same pure guitar  
signal as the analog gate, so both gates have the same sensitivity to light touch  
— no matter how many effects the guitar is going through.  
Given a choice, many players  
prefer not use gates of any kind  
as they can affect tone and play-  
ing style dynamics. In live and  
recording situations where high-  
powered amps are pushed hard,  
however, the use of a gate is  
sometimes unavoidable. (If a  
player uses stomp-box effects in  
front of the amp, and rack effects  
in the effects loop, two gates are  
required: one between the amp  
input and the last stomp box in  
the effect chain, and another on  
the amp's effects send to gate  
noise before it hits the rack pro-  
cessors.)  
When the MPX G2 is connected in front of an amp and/or in the effects loop,  
these two gates form an integrated noise reduction system that provides more  
than120dB ofattenuation. WhentheG2 is used withamp input only, theanalog  
gate provides 40dB of attenuation. When the MPX G2 is used as a stand alone  
processor, the digital gate provides 90dB of attenuation.  
Signal Flow with no Returns connected  
In a component system, the gate  
is driven by the processed guitar  
audio — which means that the  
threshold must be set quite high  
to compensate forall of the noise  
added by the pre-gain effects  
(wah, compressor, overdrive,  
etc.).Youhavetoplayprettyhard  
to get the gate to open up, and  
sustained notes are noticably  
chopped off.  
nals  
d to  
taudio frthe rpath (no In-  
sertsconnected)ortogateaudio comingin  
through the return jacks.  
As the MPX G2’s analog gate is  
driven by the unprocessed gui-  
tar, the threshold can be set  
much lower, creating a sensitive  
gate that opens up with a very  
light touch and which remains  
open considerably longer during  
sustaining notes and chords. It  
also makes it possible to use the  
guitar’s volume control to con-  
trol the gate directly.  
Signal Flow with Returns connected  
Both the analog and digitalnoise gates  
share the same sensing — which can  
be set to either Guitar Input or Return  
Only.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Meters  
The G2 has a built-in meter array that allows you to simultaneously view guitar  
input level, mainoutput levels aswell asthe levels ofall individual effects blocks,  
except Gain.  
The meters are displayed in fixed order: Input, Effect 1, Effect 2, Chorus, Delay,  
Reverb, EQ, Output.  
Effect blocks are indicated by their  
number or inital letter.  
I 1 2 C D R E O  
+
❚ ❚ ❚ ❚ ❚ ❚ ❚ ❚  
Each effect block has a 7-segment with an  
overload indicator (A + at the top of the  
meter block).  
Eachblock’soutputlevelisshown witha7-segmentmeter.Overloadisindicated  
by displaying a plus sign on the top right side of the individual meter.  
Use the meter display to check levels throughout the effect chain, or to track  
down overload in an individual effect.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ed iting  
Effect Order  
Selecting Effect Order from the Edit menu allows you to put the seven MPX G2  
Effect blocks in any order you wish. Press > to display the current ordering and  
routing configuration. An ordering display such as the one shown below will  
appear.  
An underscore identifies the Effect blockwhich  
is selected for moving to a new location.  
1=2=g=C=D=R=E  
Effect types are represented by their initial letters or numbers.  
Upper case lettersand large numbersindicate that the Effect is  
active in the current program. Lower case letters and small  
numbers indicate that the Effect is inactive.  
Each Effect block is represented by a single letter or number, an upper case  
letter or large number if the Effect is active in the current program, a lower case  
letter or small number if it is not. The symbols between each letter indicate the  
currentroutingconnectionoptions. AnunderscoreidentifiestheEffect blockthat  
is currently selectedfor repositioning. (In theexample shown above, theChorus  
block is selected.) To move the selected block to a new position, simply turn the  
knob. Use the < and >buttons to select (underscore) a different Effect block for  
repositioning.  
Usingthesame example, turn theknobtwo clickstotherighttomovetheChorus  
block and alter the Effect Order as shown below.  
The Chorus block is selected for  
repositioning.  
1=2=g=C=D=R=E  
Turntheknob oneclicktotherightto  
swap the Chorus block with the De-  
lay block.  
1=2=g=D=C=R=E  
Turn the knob one more click to the  
right to move the Chorus block an-  
other step to the right.  
1=2=g=D=R=C=E  
Press Edit to return to the main Edit menu.  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
The MPX G2 allows you to reconfigure the effect blocks along audio paths of  
your own design. The Routing Map is a graphic display that shows routing and  
connectionsbetweentheMPXG2effect blocks.Use theRoutingMaptochange  
connections between individual effects and also to change the overall routing  
configuration of all seven effect blocks as a group. All of the routing controls  
available in the Routing Map menu are explained in this section, along with  
examples of the selections you can make. Remember that you can change the  
order of the effect blocks as well. (See Effect Ordering on the previous page.)  
In these examples, we'll use the default effect order to keep things simple.  
Routing Map  
Before going into the details of the Routing Map, it's worthwhile to review basic  
signal flow through the MPX G2.  
The overall signal flow through the MPX G2 is divided into two paths: a pre-gain  
path and a post-gain path. The six DSP effect blocks (Effect 1, Effect 2, Chorus,  
Delay, Reverb and EQ) can be placed in any combination on either the pre-gain  
or post-gain portions of the audio path.  
The position of the Gain effect block in the Routing Map determines the  
boundarybetweenthetwopaths.Thepre-gainpathismadeupoftheGaineffect  
blockandall effects onthepaththat connect totheinputs of theGaineffect. The  
post-gain path consists of all effects on the path connected to the outputs of the  
Gain effect block.  
When you want to connect the G2 to external guitar amp or other gear, it is  
important to understand where the SendandInsert Returns are in relationtothe  
Routing Map display. The Send jack is permanently connected to the path at a  
point immediately following the Gain block outputs. The Insert Return jacks are  
permanently connected to the path at a point immediately following the Send.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ed iting  
The path through an MPX G2 DSP effect block looks like this:  
Note that the dry path through the effect is stereo, and a variable wet/dry mix is  
included for each DSP effect. The wet path through the effect can be stereo or  
mono in, and stereo or mono out, depending on the particular effect.  
The path through an MPX G2 analog Gain effect is slightly different:  
Notethatthereisnowet/drymix pathfor theanalogeffectsandthattheseeffects  
are mono in and mono out.  
EachoftheEffectblocks(Effect1,Effect2,Gain,Chorus,Delay,ReverbandEQ)  
is represented in the following discussion as a simple box identified by its first  
initial (1, 2, G, C, D, R and E). This is also the way each block is represented in  
the MPX G2 Routing Map display. MPX G2 inputs and outputs are represented  
by the letters I and O.  
Active Effects are represented (here and in the  
Routing Map) by upper case letters and numbers.  
Inactive Effects are represented (here and in the Routing  
Map) by lower case letters and small numbers.  
Insert Sends andReturns are not shown in theRoutingMap, but they are always  
located between the Gain block and any blocks that follow it.  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
How to Change Routing  
The routing page lets you alter the connections between the inputs of the  
selectedblockandtheoutputs oftheblocksin frontofit.It iseasy tothinkofthese  
connections as patch cords connecting the different blocks. There are five  
possible connections for the inputs of any block.  
Connections  
On the Routing Map, use the < and > buttons to select any upper case letter.  
(Lower case letters indicate inactive effects, which cannot be edited.) Use the  
knob to set your connection choice.  
How to Change Routing  
Options  
Thesignal pathwithintheMPXG2canbesplit intotwoparallel stereopaths, and  
once split, the split paths can be merged together again. The split paths are  
referred to as Upper and Lower. The Routing Map options allow you to choose  
where to split and merge the path and to place effect blocks on either the upper  
or lower paths. Thefollowing examplesshow fourgeneral configurations: apath  
with no split, a split pre-gain path, a split post-gain path, and a parallel path  
around the pre and post paths.  
All seven effects are on the upper  
path.  
The pre-gain path is split at the input  
and merged at the Gain effect.  
The post-gain path is split at the Cho-  
rus effect and merged at the EQ ef-  
fect.  
Press Options to determine the  
routing configurations for all  
blocks. Press Options again to  
return to the Routing Map.  
Splitting the path at the input and  
merging it at the outputs creates a  
separate path in parallel with the pre-  
gain and post-gain paths.  
To change the routing, from the Routing Map, press Options. Use the < and >  
buttons to select individual blocks. Use the knob to change the configuration.  
Note that the MPX G2 will only display the routing options that are available in  
thecurrent configuration. For example, if all seven blocks are on theupper path,  
the only available option will be Split. The next block downstream from a Split  
will have Upper, Lower, and Merge available as options.  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ed iting  
In the following examples we’ve selected three presets that demonstrate Routing Examples  
creative applications of the routing and connection capabilities of the MPX G2.  
Example 1:  
Program 198 Cordovox  
Cordovox Routing Map  
(Stand Alone)  
This program produces the sound of a vintage Cordovox rotary speaker. The  
Cordovox is a speaker cabinet containing a fixed 8-inch speaker mounted  
behind a rotating baffle. It projects sound out of the sides and top of the cabinet,  
not the front. The baffle can rotate at either fast or slow speeds. The transition  
time between the different rates is quite long. The characteristic swirling sound  
it producesis theresult ofdoppler andpanningeffects combinedwiththelimited  
bandwidth of the small, easy-to-distort speaker and the tone qualities of the  
amplifier used to drive the Cordovox cabinet.  
In this program, the guitar is first routed through the Gain block, which uses the  
Preamptomimictheampandspeakercharacteristics.TheoutputofthePreamp  
is connected to the Chorus block. The Stereo Chorus produces the doppler  
portionsoftheoverall sound. TheChorus blockoptionis settoSplit, creatingtwo  
parallel audio paths. Effect 1 and Effect 2 are placed on these lower and upper  
paths, and each is loaded with an Auto Panner effect.  
Effect 2 is connected to the left output of the Chorus block and Effect 1 is  
connected to the right output. Each Auto Panner “sees” a different input signal  
and, together they produce the complex panning dynamics required to simulate  
the complex stereo image created by miking the cabinet with left and right  
microphones.ThestereooutputofEffect2isconnectedtotheReverbblock.The  
Reverb outputs are summed with the outputs of the Auto Panner in Effect 1 and  
sent to the Main Outputs.  
The A/B controller is patched to the Chorus and Auto Panner rates to allow you  
to choose between slow and fast speeds.  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Example 2:  
Program 61 Octave Fuzz  
(Amp Input + FX Loop)  
Octave Fuzz Routing Map  
The Octave Fuzz program combines sub-octave and Octavia-style effects with  
analog distortion. When connected to the high gain input of a guitar amp, many  
classic Octave Fuzz effects can be produced.  
The Input block option is set to Split, to create two parallel paths. The paths are  
joined together at the input of the Gain block by setting its option to Merge.  
Effect 1 is placed on the lower path and Effect 2 is placed on the upper path.  
Effect 1is loadedwithShift(M) andsettoproduceafixedpitchshift ofoneoctave  
down. Effect 2 is loaded with Octabuzz to create the Octavia sound. The use of  
the split path here allows each effect to be fed into the Gain block without  
interacting with each other.  
In the Gain block, the Distortion effect is set to produce moderate-gain fuzz.  
A/B is set to turn the ouput of the sub octave on and off.  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ed iting  
Example 3:  
Program 219 Infinite Echo  
(Stand Alone)  
Infinite Echo Routing Map  
The Infinite Echo program is an analog tape delay effect with auto ducking and  
infinite feedback. It demonstrates the routing techniques used to create an  
analog feedback path. This unique feature of the MPX G2 makes it possible to  
recreate the sound of classic analog delay, chorus and flanger effects.  
The guitar signal is routed through the Delay block, which is loaded with  
Echo(M). The Delay block output is connected to the Gain block. Here the  
Overdrive effect is used to impart the tone and distortion characteristics of the  
preamp in avintageanalog echoeffect. TheGainblock optionis set toSplit. The  
upper path is used as the “normal” path to the Main Outputs. The Reverb block  
is placed on this upper path to add some Hall reverb to the overall sound.  
The lower path is used as a feedback path to the Delay block. It consists of a  
detuner,compressorandvolume control,inseries.Thefeedbackpathiscreated  
by setting the Delay effect Fbk Insert parameter to Effect 2. (Be sure to read  
about this option of the Fbk parameter in the Delay Effects portion of Chapter  
7:TheEffects andParameters.) Thiscreatesafeedbackpaththat flowsfrom the  
ouput of Effect 2 back into the Echo(M) effect. The master level of the signal is  
controlled by the Echo(M) Fbk parameter. All of the blocks between the Delay  
and Effect 2 blocks are also in the feedback path. Every time the Echo repeats,  
thesignal recirculates through the analogGain block aswell as theDetuner and  
Compressor.  
The volume control is set to Off, so no audio from this path is passed to the Main  
Outputs. Also, the program is stored with the Insert bypassed to keep the guitar  
amp preamp out of the feedback loop in Amp Input and FX Loop applications.  
These tricks allows the program to be used whether connected for Stand Alone,  
Amp Input Only or Amp Input & FX Loop applications.  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
The Overdrive effect produces the analog tone and saturation of tape echo  
electronics.The Detuner is patched to the Random controller to add pitch  
fluctuations caused by the wow and flutter typical of tape delay mechanical  
systems. The Compressor limits the feedback signal so that it never goes  
completely out of control. As new notes are played, the compressor lowers the  
feedback level. When the playing stops, the echo repeats begin to swell in  
volume, but the compressor keeps the swell from going into overload. This  
allows feedbacksettingstoproduceinfinite repeat — withthe soundevolvingon  
each repeat. A/B is patched to clear the delay.  
1. The number of configurations you can create is huge. The best approach  
to take is to think about what you want before changing anything.  
Notes and Tips on Routing  
2. When changing the routing options, work from left to right — from the input  
block to the output block.  
3. The MPX G2 will only display the routing options that are available in the  
currentconfiguration.Forexample,ifallsevenblocksareontheupperpath,  
the only available option will be Split. The next block downstream from a  
Split will have Upper, Lower, and Merge available as options.  
4. The MPX G2 automatically updates the routing options downstream from  
the selected block as necessary. For example, if you change a Split path  
to Upper, all of the following blocks will be set to Upper as well.  
5. You can also move effects while the Routing Map is displayed:  
Press and hold Options. After about two seconds, the display will show  
Move effect. Continue to hold down the Options button and select the  
effectblockyouwanttomovewiththe<and>buttons.Turntheknobtodrag  
the selected effect to a new position.  
The Edit mode Patching menu allows you to control effect parameters in real-  
timefrom avarietyof external, MIDIandinternal controllers. Thisimportanttopic  
deserves its own chapter and is covered in Chapter 4.  
Patching  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ed iting  
Controllers  
This Edit menu selection provides controls for making individual adjustments  
and assignments for each of the MPX G2 internal controllers: Knob, LFO 1,  
LFO 2, Random, A/B and Env. This section describes controller editing. For  
detailed information on the controllers themselves, see Chapter 8.  
Making controller adjustments is straightforward. The first of the controller  
selections (Knob) is shown here as an example. (Although each controller has  
a different set of parameters, the method for selecting and adjusting them is  
identical.)  
Ctls select:  
>
Knob  
Controller selected for adjustment  
Use the<and> buttons tostepthroughtheavailable parameters oftheselected  
controller and the knob to adjust controller settings.  
Successive screens show each controller  
parameter and its current value  
Ctls:Knob  
< >  
Value  
n
value of displayed controller  
parameter  
Ctls:Knob  
< >  
Low  
n
Use the < and >buttons  
to move back and forth  
between the controller  
selection screen and  
each of the related pa-  
rameter screens.  
Ctls:Knob  
< >  
High  
n
Ctls:Knob  
Name  
<
CustomAdj  
Onceyouhaveadjustedtheselectedcontrollertoyoursatisfaction,youcanstep  
back through the parameter screens, or press Edit to return to the main Edit  
menu.  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
The parameters in the Tempo menu: Rate, Source, Beat Value, Tap Average,  
Tap Source and Source Level, allow you to select the way in which the actual  
tempo in BPM is determined for each effect.  
Tempo  
The MPX G2 gives you unique control over tempo. In the MPX G2, any delay  
parameter and any time-based modulator (LFO, etc.) can be individually  
assigned to an absolute time value, or assigned to a tempo value.  
For example, a delay time can be set to a specific number of milliseconds, and  
you will always get a delay of that number of milliseconds, regardless of tempo  
changes. Alternatively, a delay time can be set to a specific ratio of echoes to  
beats. Now, if you create a rhythmic echo pattern, delay times will be linked to  
tempo.Whenyouchangetempo,thedelay timewillchangetomaintain thesame  
rhythm at the new tempo.  
With the LFOs, the rate of change can be an absolute value (such as once per  
second), or it can be linked to tempo (for example, once every four beats). Any  
delay parameter or LFO rate canbesettoits ownindividual rhythm, allowing you  
to set upan effect which will change in arhythmically interesting way — evolving  
over time, for example, as opposed to being a mere series of repetitions. Once  
delaysandLFOratesareassigned,temporatecanbeeasily changedinavariety  
of useful ways.  
Tempo Rate can be set internally or via MIDI Clock. If Tempo Source is set to  
Internal, you can dial in any tempo from 41-400 BPM, or you can press the front  
panel Tap button twice in rhythm to establish the rate you want (allowing you to  
change tempo on the fly from any mode). You can also have thevalue of a patch  
source act as a tap trigger (See Chapter 4: Patching.) or choose to have your  
tempotransmittedasaMIDI Clock signal tocontrol thetempo ofconnectedMIDI  
devices. (See Chapter 5: System Controls or Chapter 6: MIDI Operation.) If  
Source is set to MIDI Clock, MPX G2 tempo will sync to incoming MIDI Clock.  
Whether tempo is set internally or via MIDI, the front panelTempo LED will flash  
at the current rate whenever any delay or LFO rate is set for tempo control.  
MPX G2 programs can have their own tempo rate settings which are stored with  
the program. You can override these individual tempo rates with a global tempo  
rateintheSystem Setupmenu. Tempois alsoavailableasanindependentpatch  
sourcewhich cancontrol any program parameter. (SeeChapter 4: Patchingand  
Chapter 5: System Controls.)  
This is the current tempo (in beats per minute). When Source is set to Internal,  
you can select any rate here from 41 to 400 BPM. The Tempo LED will flash at  
the new rate. Fractional tempos can be tapped in, but the display will always  
show the nearest whole number value.  
Rate  
Source  
You can choose to have tempo determined by the MPX G2 Tap and Rate  
controls (Internal), or by MIDI Clock (MIDI). Tap also acts as a reset, setting the  
downbeat of the LFOs.  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ed iting  
Tempo is expressed in BPM. This control allows you to specify the value of the Beat Value  
beat (Eighth, DottedEighth, Quarter, DottedQuarter, 2-126 Beats). If, for ex-  
ample, you select EighthNote here, each Tap will be interpreted as an eighth-  
note. If youselectQuarterNote here, eachTapwill beinterpretedasanquarter-  
note. (The factory default is QuarterNote.)  
Beat Value Option: Tap Average  
Press Options to access the Tap Average control which allows you to average  
Press Options to set a Tap Aver-  
age for more gradual tempo  
changes when you press Tap.  
thelast 2-8 Taps. Higher numbers mean that the response toincoming Tapswill  
be more gradual, as the tempo will be updated on each Tap with an averaged  
value.  
Assign the Tap function to any of the MPX G2 Internal, MIDI or MIDI  
controllers(None, Off, On, Knob, Puls1, Tri1, Sine1, Cos1, Puls2, Tri2, Sine2,  
Cos2, Rand, Env, A/B, ATrg, BTrg, ABTrg, Pedal, Tog1, Tog2, Tog3, Sw1, Sw2,  
Sw3, CC1-31, CC33-119, Bend, Touch, Vel, Last Note, Low Note, High Note,  
Tempo, Cmnds, Gate, Trig, LGate, Toe).  
Tap Source  
Tap Source Option: Tap Source Level  
Press Options to set a Tap  
SourceLevelfortheTapfunction.  
Press Options to access the Tap Source Level control which allows you to set  
the level (0-127) at which the Tap function is triggered.  
WheneveryoueditanMPXG2program, aneditindicatorwill appearin Program  
mode, in front of the program name on the display to let you know that the  
program has been changed since the last store operation.  
Compare  
EQ programs  
.Splitter AB  
In Program mode an edit indicator appears before the program name  
if the program has been changed since the last store operation.  
To hear theoriginal version, press Edit to show the Edit select screen. Turn the  
knob to display Compare.  
Press the > button. If the program has not been edited, the message Pgm is  
unchanged will be displayed. If the program has been edited, the display will  
change to show:  
Compare:  
Edited Original  
Use the < and > buttons to select and hear your edited version, or the original.  
To exit, press Edit to return to the main Edit menu.  
NOTE: If you exit with Original selected, you can view the original program  
parameters, butcannotedit them. Tocontinueediting, exit withEditedselected.  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Parameters that youwanttoassign totheSoft Row for easy access are selected  
from the Edit mode Soft Row Assign menu. Use the < and > buttons to select  
any of the ten Soft Row positions. Turn the knob to scroll through and assign  
parameters to the selected position. (All parameters in the current program are  
available for assignment. The example below shows the FX 1 Level parameter  
assigned to the first position in the Soft Row.)  
Soft Row Parameter  
Assignment  
Edit Soft 1:  
< >  
FX 1Level  
Your selections are immediately available for quick editing whenever the front  
panel Soft Row button is pressed.  
The MPX G2 allows you to individually tag all 250 programs for easy sorting by  
Style and/or Effect and Application type. The DataBase controls in the Edit  
menulet youassignyour programs toany (or all) ofthecategories shown below.  
DataBase Assignments  
Guitar Style:  
Acoustic  
Bass  
Blues  
Clean  
Country  
Jazz  
Rock  
Effect type:  
Chorus  
Delay  
Distortion  
EQ  
Flanger  
Gain  
Mod  
Overdrive  
Phaser  
Pitch  
Reverb  
SpkrSim  
Wah  
All  
App type:  
StndAlne  
Amp In  
FX Loop  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ed iting  
WhenyouselectDataBase, thedisplaywill show aselectionliketheonebelow.  
The upper line identifies the selection category  
(guitar style, effect type or application type.  
DBase App Type  
FX Loop:  
NO  
The lower line shows the Style, Effect or Application type and  
the current DataBase selection (YES or NO). The selected  
field will flash to let you know which is selected for changing.  
The item on the lower line of the display which is selected for adjustment will  
flash. Use the < and> buttons to move between the display fields. Use theknob  
to scroll through all of the Source and Effect types in the left field, and to select  
YES or NO in the right field.  
If you make changes in the DataBase menu, when you exit, the Store LED will  
Press Store to  
update DBase  
flash and the following message will be displayed.  
Press Store to save your changes to the DataBase. Press any other button to  
exit with the DataBase unchanged.  
Press Edit to return to the main Edit menu.  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Copy Effect lets you take an Effect from any program in the MPX G2 and copy  
it intothecurrent program. To usethis function, select Copy Effectfrom theEdit  
menu. Press the > button and use the knob to display any of the MPX G2  
programs. The front panel Effect buttons light to show you which effect blocks  
are active in the displayed program. Press any lit button to display:  
Copy Effect  
The name of the effect from the displayed  
program appears on the upper line.  
new: Looper  
old: Echo (S)  
The name of the effect you will be replacing in the  
current program appears on the lower line.  
The effect button will flash to show that it is selected for copying. Press it tocopy  
the effect you selected into the current program. If the copy procedure is  
successful, aconfirmationmessagewill bedisplayedbriefly, andthedisplaywill  
revert to showing the Copy Effect selections.  
As different effects vary widely in the amount of processing they require, not all  
combinations of effects are possible. If the current program is already using  
many effects, or if it is usinga combination which requiresmaximum processing  
power, a message will be displayed informing you that there are not enough  
resources to run the effect you have selected. If this happens, you can try  
copying another effect, or you can copy an inactive effect (by pressing an unlit  
button running "No Effect") to reduce the processing requirements.  
n you select  
Copy Effect, the active  
effects of the displayed program  
are lighted. Press any lighted but-  
ton to initate the copy procedure.  
Note that patches are not copied along with effects.  
Press Edit to exit to the main Edit menu.  
The button will flash.  
Once you have selected  
thespecificeffectyouwanttocopy,  
press the effect button again to  
complete the procedure.  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Patching is the ability to assign a control (Source) to a parameter (Destination).  
This allows you to alter the value of the parameter by manipulating the control  
Source. For example, you can select the front panel knob as a Source and an  
effect's Mix parameter as a Destination. This simple patch will allow you to  
dynamically alter the mix of the effect whenever you turn the knob.  
Patching  
You can create as many as five patches. You can patch multiple parameters to  
a single controller, or patch multiple Sources to a single Destination. This  
chapter contains all the information you need to use the MPX G2 program  
patching system. Global Patching is described in Chapter 5: System Controls.  
MPX G2 Patch controls are accessed in Edit mode.  
In the Edit menu, select Patching to access the patch assigned  
to a displayed parameter, or to create or alter a patch.  
When a Patch is selected, the display will show:  
Use the knob to select a Patch  
number (1-5).  
Patch select:  
< >  
Patch 1  
The numeric display will show the Patch  
number you have selected.  
The Patch number you select in the alphanumeric display will be displayed on  
the large numeric display as well. This display will remain on as long as you are  
in the Patching System to identify the currently selected patch.  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
From the patch number display, press > to step to the patch Source and  
Destination assignment screen. The display will show the current Source  
assignment on the top line, and the current Destination assignment on the  
bottom line. One of the assignments will be flashing to let you know which is  
selected for adjustment. Use the < and > buttons to select the Source  
assignment field, and the knob to select a Source from the available list.  
Selecting a Source  
and Destination  
Patch Sources  
All Sources are the same in the  
sense that each generates an out-  
put value in the range of 0-127. The  
output value is used to increase or  
decrease the setting of a Destina-  
tion parameter value. Some gener-  
ate values continuously (they're al-  
ways "on" ); some generate output  
based on the position of a particular  
external MIDI controller, or a  
footpedal, or footswitch. Some  
Sources generate output based on  
aspects of physical performance  
such as how loud, how fast, or how  
hard you play. The MPX G2 allows  
you to choose a Source for each  
Destination from the following list.  
In this example, the Source assignment  
field is selected. The knob willscrollthrough  
all of the available Source selections.  
Src: Ctls  
< > Dst: RvbDecay  
A/B  
From the same screen, use the < and > buttons to select the Destination  
assignment field, andtheknobtoselect aDestinationfrom thelist ofparameters  
of the currently loaded program.  
Src: Ctls  
< > Dst: RvbDecay  
A/B  
With the Destination assignment field  
selected, the knob will scroll through  
all of the parameters of the currently  
loaded program.  
Patch Sources  
Ctls: Off  
MIDI:CC 1  
On  
Knob  
Puls1  
Tri1  
Sine1  
Cos1  
Puls2  
Tri2  
LFO1  
LFO2  
CC31  
CC33  
For most applications, that's all there is to setting up a patch. The default patch  
values will set the controller to match the full range of its travel to the full range  
oftheDestinationparameter. To customize your patches, theMPXG2provides  
a full set of additional controls. Each of these is described in the following  
sections.  
Sine2  
Cos2  
Rand  
Env  
CC119  
Bend  
Touch  
Vel  
InLvl  
Last Note  
RnLvl  
A/B  
Low Note  
High Note  
Tempo  
Cmnds  
Gate  
Trig  
LGate  
Tsw  
ATrg  
BTrg  
ABTrg  
Pedal  
Tog 1-3  
Sw 1-3  
Toe  
Sources are displayed with the prefix  
Ctls or MIDI. Ctls are internal  
MPX G2 controllers and rear panel  
switches and pedal inputs. MIDI  
sources are all designated MIDI con-  
trollers.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pa tc hing  
WithSrcselected, pressingOptionswill allow youtospecify rangelimitsfor the  
controller youhaveselected. With thefollowing screendisplayed, usethe<and  
> buttons to select the Min, Mid or Max field, and the knob to set the value from  
0-127. The default settings of Min=0 and Max=127, cause the parameter to be  
controlled linearly by the controller. Reversing these values (Min=127 and  
Max=0) will establish inverse control over the parameter. Adding a Mid value  
allows you to put a pivot point in the patch. All patches have default settings of  
Min=0, Max=127, with no Mid values assigned.  
Changing the Range of  
the Source Controller  
Src: Min Mid Max  
With Src selected, press Options  
tosetrangelimitsfor the controller  
you have selected. Press Options  
again toreturntothe Patch Source  
and Destination assignment  
screen.  
>
0
- - - 127  
In this example, the underscore indicates that the  
Min value field is selected. The knob will select  
values from 0-127. Press > once to select the Mid  
field, once again to select the Max field.  
Viewing Source  
Controller Activity  
From the Src Value screen pressing the > button beyond the Max value field  
selects a reference screen where you can view the actual behavior of the  
controller you've selected.  
With theMaxvaluefieldselected,pressing>will  
forward you to the Source Activity screen.  
Src: Min Mid Max  
>
0
- - - 127  
Source Val: 0  
< > Peak: 0  
Press < to return to the  
Source Value screen.  
The Source Activity screen lets you reference actual  
controller values to help you determine the most  
useful range.  
The Source Activity screen displays the actual activity of the controller youhave  
designated as the Patch Source. Moving the controller will allow you to view the  
actual controller value in real time (Val). The peak controller value is referenced  
on the lower line (Peak). This lets you quickly determine the most useful range  
settings for the controller.  
Forexample, ifyouhaveselectedInputLevelastheSource, andyounoticefrom  
the Activity screen that the actual level never rises above 100, you can quickly  
back up to the Src Value screen ( press < once) and set the Max value to 100.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
You can have the MPX G2 automatically recognize a MIDI controller as a patch  
Source, as well as assigning its MIDI Receive channel to match any controller  
with the MIDI Learn function.  
MIDI Learn — Automatic  
Controller Assignment  
From theSource Activity screen, press >toaccess theMIDI Learn screen. With  
this screen displayed, simply move any active MIDI controller to automatically  
assignit astheSourcefor thecurrent patch. TheMPXG2will alsorecognize the  
MIDI channel ofthecontroller andreset tothat channel for receipt ofall incoming  
MIDI messages.  
From the Source Activity screen, press > to  
access MIDI Learn.  
Source Val: 0  
< >  
Peak: 0  
Src: MIDI learn  
CC1 Ch: 1  
<
Press < to return to the  
Source Activity screen.  
Simplymove any attached MIDI controller to have the  
MPX G2 recognize it as the patch Source and switch  
to its MIDI channel. This example shows the result of  
moving a Mod Wheel (CC1) on a connected MIDI  
device transmitting on Channel 1.  
From the MIDI Learn screen, press< repeatedly to step back through the Patch  
Source Options. Press Options to return to the Source and Destination  
assignment screen.  
From the Source and Destination assigmment screen, selecting Dst and  
pressing Options will allow you to copy any other patch to the patch you are  
working on. With the following screen displayed, use the knob to select patch 1-  
5, or — to leave the current patch unchanged.  
Copying Patches  
Dst:  
Copy patch  
– –  
In this example, – indicates no patch information is to be copied.  
Other selections (1-5)willautomaticallycopy information fromthe  
indicated patch to the current patch when you exit Options.  
With Dst selected on the Source  
and Destination assignment  
screen,pressOptionstocopyany  
other patch into the current patch.  
Your selection will take effect im-  
mediately when you exit by press-  
ing Options again.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pa tc hing  
For most applications, the default full-range Destination values are all you will  
want, as these allow your selected Source to exert direct control over the full  
range of parameter values. In other cases, you may want to adjust the  
Destination values to a more limited range, or establish a nonlinear relationship  
between the controller and the parameter values.  
Changing the Range of  
the Destination  
Parameter  
With a Destination assigned, and the Destination field selected, press > to  
displaythefirstoftwoPatchValuescreenswhereyoucansetMinandMaxlimits  
for the selected parameter. With Max selected, press > again to display a Mid  
Point selection screen where you can set a pivot point within the Destination  
parameter range to allow nonlinear control. (Note, that a Mid point must be  
assignedtotheSourcerange, before a DestinationMid point is recognized. See  
Page 4-3.)  
With the Destination assignment field selected,  
press >to display the Destination value screen.  
Src: Ctls  
A/B  
< > Dst: RvbDecay  
Min  
Max  
< > 0.14s  
26.2s  
Use the < and > buttonsto select the parameter  
value fields. Use the knob to adjust the value  
within the selected field.  
With the rightmost field selected,  
press > again to access the Mid  
Point selection screen.  
Mid  
<
0.975  
Press <to step backto  
Use the knob to enter a Mid Point value.  
the previous screen.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Linear or Nonlinear  
From either of the Destination Values screens, pressing Options will allow you  
tosetthecontrol relationship betweenyour Source andDestination, temporarily  
suspend the current patch, or to clear one or more patches entirely.  
Control  
Patch Values  
>
Unchanged  
"Unchanged" isprovided asa selection to allow you  
to exit Options without altering or erasing any  
patches. Pressing > will step you forward through  
the other options.  
Pressing Options from either of  
the Destination value screens lets  
you determine the controlrelation-  
ship between the Source and Des-  
tination, and clear any or all  
patches. Your selection will take  
effect immediately when you  
press Options again.  
As selections made in Options will take effect immediately when you press  
Options to exit, the first screen, "Unchanged", gives you the choice of exiting  
without altering or erasing any patches.  
Press > to step through the other control selections: Normal, Inverted, Mid  
Peak, and Mid Dip. These let you set the control relationship between the  
controller and the parameter as described below.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pa tc hing  
Continuing to press > will step you to the Suspend option. Selecting Suspend  
temporaily suspendsthepatchuntil suchtimeasyoureturntothePatchSystem  
Destination Option and select Unsuspend.  
Suspending and  
Clearing Patches  
Continuingtopress>willstepyoutotheoptions:Clear1-5,andClearAll.These  
allow you to select any or all patches to be cleared.  
Once you have made any selection, press Options to have your choice take  
effect and to return to the Source and Destination Assignment screen.  
If you create two or more patches with the same Destination, the Destination  
value will be the sum of all patches assigned to it.  
Multiple Patches with  
the Same Destination  
For example, if a Footpedal, andtheknobare both assignedtoMstr Mix, theMix  
value will be the sum of the patch Destination values for those two patches.  
When creating multiple patches to the same Destination, you should set the  
individual Destinations to values which, when added together, are less than or  
equal to the maximum value for each parameter. The Footpedal and the knob,  
for example, could each have a maximum value of 50%, or they could be  
assigned values of 25% and 75%, 60% and 40%, etc.  
When the sum of multiple patched parameter Destination values is greater than  
the maximum value of the parameter, the parameter value will remain at  
maximum until the sum of the patches falls below it.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
System Controls  
The System menus shown below provide access to all of the controls which  
affect overall operation ofthe MPXG2, suchas Bypassstate, MIDI transmit and  
receive channels, as well as some unique options that make the MPX G2 adapt  
toyourpersonalrequirements.Thesecontrolsareeachexplainedindetailinthis  
chapter, in the order in which they are displayed in System mode.  
The System Menus  
Press System to enter the System menu, and use the knob to select the  
particular menu you want. With the menu of your choice displayed (Audio,  
Modes, etc.), use the < and > buttons to enter the submenu and select  
parameters, and the knob to adjust parameter values. When you're finished  
making adjustments within any menu, press System to return to the main  
System menu, or press the < and > buttons to select another control from the  
same menu.  
Audio Controls  
Soft Sat  
The Audio menu allows you to change the settings of controls which affect the  
MPX G2 audio output characteristics.  
The Soft Sat control puts an analog soft-knee limiter in front of the input of the  
MPX G2 A/D converters. This control essentially allows you to trade the  
harshness of digital distortion for a softer, analog version. The harshness  
associated with A/D overload at signal levels above -3dBfs is reduced. In-  
creasedanalogdistortionwilloccurin therangeof-3dBfsto0dBfs. Theavailable  
settings are On and Off.  
In Output Mode, select Stereo or Mono as the output mode of the MPX G2.  
Output Mode  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Modes  
The MPX G2 Modes menu allows you to specify certain system-wide param-  
eters andmodesofoperationfor convenience. Eachof theseis describedin this  
section.  
Pgm Load allows you to choose whether programs will be loaded manually or  
Pgm Load  
automatically.  
Selecting Manual allows you to scroll through programs in Program mode,  
viewing them according to the DataBase criteria you've selected. Programs  
which are not loaded are identified by an asterisk () preceding the displayed  
name, and flashing of the Program button LED. Press Program to load the  
displayed program.  
Selecting Auto (the default setting) will cause programs to be loaded automati-  
cally following a brief timeout whenever they are selected in Program mode.  
Each MPX G2 program has its own Post Mix and Level parameters, as well as  
individual mix and level settings for each Effect. These settings are stored as  
integral parts of the program. The Mix parameter allows you to select Program,  
to have each program load with its own Mix setting, or Global which allows any  
program Mix setting to become the global setting for all subsequently loaded  
programs.  
Mix  
Pgm Bypass allows you to determine the behavior of the MPX G2 during the  
transition when a new program is loaded. The choices available are: All Mute  
or Bypass.  
Pgm Bypass  
Tempo Mode  
The MPX G2 gives you an exciting approach to working with delay times and  
modulation parameters. You can set these parameters in beats, allowing you to  
control your programs in a completely musical way. Each MPX G2 program has  
its own Tempo parameters, with tempo settings stored as an integral part of the  
program. These include Tempo Rate, Tempo Source (Internal or MIDI), Beat  
ValueandTapSource. The Globalsettinghereallows youtooverrideindividual  
Tempo Rate settings with a global value which can then be changed on the fly.  
When shipped, the MPX G2 has the Tempo Mode set to Program, with each  
program driven by its own stored tempo rate. To change to a global tempo rate,  
select Global here.  
Whether Tempo Mode is set to Global or Program, you can set a new tempo  
rate by pressing the front panel Tap button twice. Alternatively, you can choose  
to have tempo set automatically from incoming MIDI clock. The rate you tap, or  
the MIDI tempo, will become the global setting.  
For more information about working with the tempo parameters, see Chapter 3:  
Editing.  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Syste m Co ntro ls  
The MPX G2 provides a memory protection feature to prevent accidental  
overwriting of your stored programs. When this control is set to On, attempting  
to store a program will cause the Store process to abort, and an error message  
to be displayed. To enable the Store function, select Off. (This is the default  
setting.)  
Memory Protect  
Press Options to  
et StorePrompt  
On or Off. Press Options  
again to exit.  
Option: StorePrompt  
To have the MPX G2 warn you whenever loading a new program would erase  
changes you have made but have not saved, press Options and set  
StorePrompt to On.  
This control allows you to adjust the brightness of the alphanumeric display  
along a range of 0-15.  
Brightness  
Thesetting of Sleep modedeterminesthe behavior of theMPX G2when it is left  
idle. When it is on, a set of messages is cycled across the display. Like a  
computerscreensaver,anyactivityonanypanelcontrolwillautomaticallyreturn  
the MPX G2 to normal operation. When shipped, Sleep is set to Off. You can  
change this mode to display general Help messages.  
Sleep  
Post Bypass  
The Post Bypass parameter allows you to determine the behavior of the MPX  
G2's post gaineffects whenthefrontpanel Bypassbuttonis pressed. Whenthe  
Bypass button is pressed, it will light and a message will be briefly displayed to  
indicate that Bypass is on. Pressing Bypass again will briefly display the  
message that Bypass is off, and turn the button light off.  
The choices available from the Post Bypass Mode menu are:  
Bypass: Completely bypasses the post gain effects, passing  
unprocessed audio directly through to the outputs.  
(This is the default setting.)  
All Mute: Mutes both the input and the output signal, giving  
complete silence.  
Input Mute: Mutes the input tothe post gain effects, allowing thetail  
of the effect to ring out.  
Disabled: Post gain effects are not changed when Bypass is  
pressed.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Send Bypass  
The SendBypass parameter allows you to set the bypass behavior of the pre-  
gain path (everything between the Guitar Input and the Insert Send jack) when  
the front panel Bypass button is pressed. The choices are:  
Disabled: Bypass has no effect on the pre-gain path.  
Bypass: An internal relay bypasses the pre-gain path with an analog  
"straight wire" between the Guitar Input and the Send jack. (This  
is the default setting.)  
Insert Mute: Bypassbypasses thepre-gain pathwith ananalog "straight wire"  
between the Guitar Input and the Send jack.  
Insert Mute mutes thepre-gain pathafter theSendand bypasses  
the Insert Return jacks. This allows the Insert button to be used  
as a preamp bypass when the MPX G2 is connected to a guitar  
amp input and its effects loop.  
Insert  
Formaximum flexibility whenconnectingothergear totheG2via theInsertSend  
and Return jacks, three Insert Modes are provided: FX Loop, Mix and Parallel.  
FX Loop allows gear to be connected in series between the pre-gain and post-  
gain paths. This is themost useful setting whentheMPX G2is used withaguitar  
amp that has an effects loop, when an external processor is connected to the  
MPXG2, or whenthe MPXG2is usedas astandalonepreampwitheffects. This  
is the default setting.  
In this mode, signals inserted into the MPX G2 rear panel Return jack(s) are  
passed through a level control, a selectable analog speaker simulator, and then  
routed (via 24-bit A/D converters) into the post-gain DSP path. In the MPX G2  
Effect Order or Routing Map display (Edit mode), the return signal is inserted  
immediately after the Gain block (G in the display).  
Mix mode allows the return jacks tobe used as an analog line mixer. This mode  
is provided for applications when you want to have additional, unprocessed  
audio mixed with the outputs of the MPX G2. For example, you would use this  
mode to Insert the output of a CD or DAT player so you can play along with  
headphones. Signals inserted into the MPX G2 rear panel Return jack(s) pass  
through the level control and are mixed with the main and headphone outputs  
ofthe MPXG2. Note that whenthis modeis selected, theReturnsignals are not  
processed by the MPX G2.  
Parallelmodeallowsgeartobeconnectedinparallelbetweenthepre-andpost-  
gain paths. Use this mode if you want to convert a serial guitar amp effects loop  
into a parallel loop. The parallel signal path provided by this mode allows thedry  
analog guitar signal to pass directly to the power amp without running through  
any converters. Note that when using a parallel effects loop, the Post: Mix  
parameter (Edit mode) shouldbesetto100%wet. Signals insertedintotheMPX  
G2rear panel Return jack(s) are passedthroughthelevel control andselectable  
speaker simulator, then split in parallel — through the post-gain DSP path and  
mixed with the main and headphone outputs.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Syste m Co ntro ls  
Setup Load and  
Setup Store  
A set of parameters from System mode, including audio parameters, Modes,  
MIDI parameters and your current DataBase sorting method are collectively  
called a "Setup". Five Setups can be stored in the unit, allowing you to quickly  
reconfigurethe MPXG2at any time. TheSetup Load and Setup Storecontrols  
allow you to saveyour current configuration as Setup 1-5 and toreconfigure the  
MPX G2 to any of these stored states.  
When the MPX G2 is shipped (or when you reinitialize the unit) default values  
are assigned to the Setup parameters. The following table shows these  
parameters and the factory default setting of each.  
Menu  
Parameter  
Default Setting  
Program  
Database Sort  
by Number  
System Audio  
Output Mode  
Soft Sat  
Analog  
Off  
Modes  
Pgm Load  
Mix  
Pgm Bypass  
Tempo  
Auto  
Program  
Bypass  
Program  
Off  
MemProtect  
StorePrompt  
Off  
Brightness  
Sleep  
9
Off  
Post Bypass  
Send Bypass  
Insert  
Bypass  
Bypass  
FX Loop  
MIDI  
Pgm Change  
On  
1
Pgm# Offset  
Pgm+  
Pgm–  
Receive Channel  
Transmit Channel  
Pgm Change Mode  
Ctl Send  
Ctl Smooth  
MIDI Clock  
Automation  
Xmit ID  
Off  
Off  
1
1
On  
None  
0
Off  
Off  
0
SysEx  
Receive ID  
Soft Thru  
On  
0
Off  
Fast  
Xmit Speed  
Initialize  
Tuner  
Bypass Patches  
R1  
Tuner Cal  
Tuner Offset  
Tuner Bypass Mode  
440.00HzA  
0 Cents  
Mute  
Global Effects  
Speaker Sim  
Noise Gate  
Reverb  
Program  
Program  
Program  
Global  
Bypass  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
To load a Setup, select Setup Load from the System Modes menu.  
Modes: Setup Load  
< >  
(Press Store)  
The LED in the Store button will flash. When you press Store the display will  
show:  
Load #n: Setup1  
(Press Store)  
The upper line of the display shows the Setup number currently selected for  
loading. Turn the knob to select any Setup number 1-5. Press Store again. The  
display will show:  
New setup loaded  
ThentheMPXG2will returntonormal operationwiththenew Setupparameters  
in effect.  
Theprocedure forstoring anewSetupisalmostidentical, butincludes theoption  
ofassigninganametoyour Setup. SelectSetup Storefrom theSystem Modes  
menu.  
Modes: Setup Store  
<
(Press Store)  
The LED in the Store button will flash. When you press Store the display will  
show:  
Use the < and > buttons to move an  
underbar cursor to anyone of 9 characters  
available in the upper line for naming, or to  
the Setup # in the lower line.  
Setup 1  
#1: Setup 1  
Theupper lineshows adefault Setupname(Setup 1in our example). Thelower  
line shows a Setup number (1-5) and the current name of that Setup. The < and  
> buttons move an underbar cursor in the display from each one of the nine  
characters available for the name, to the # on the bottom line.The knob selects  
alphanumeric characters at each cursor location.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Syste m Co ntro ls  
Once you've made changes to the Setup name or selected a new number for  
it, press Store again. The display will show:  
Are you sure?  
Yes or No  
To store your new Setup, press Yes. To return to the Setup Store display without  
saving the Setup, press No.  
This menu contains all of the MPX G2 MIDI controls. The operation of each of  
these controls is described here. More information on working with MIDI is  
presented in Chapter 6.  
MIDI  
Program Change  
The Pgm Change control allows you to enable or disable the Reception of MIDI  
Program Change messages. The manner in which the MPXG2 interprets these  
messages is determined by your selection here.  
Off All Program Change and Bank Select messages are ignored. Pgm +  
and Pgm - will load the next higher or lower program.  
On Program Change messages are recognized.  
Press Options to access Pgm+  
and Pgm- controls and to set a  
program number offset. Press  
Options again to return to the  
MIDI menu.  
Options: Pgm# Offset, Pgm+ and Pgm-  
Pressing Options from the Pgm Change display allows you to offset MPX G2  
program numbers to match another MIDI device.  
From Options you can also map Pgm+ and Pgm- controls to load the next  
higheror lowerprogram.Thefollowingsourcescanbeselectedtoactivatethese  
controls:  
None  
Tog 1-3  
Sw 1-3  
CC 1-119  
Receive  
Select MIDI Channel 1-16, OMNI or Off for receipt of MIDI messages.  
Select MIDI Channel 1-16, or Off for transmission of MIDI messages.  
Transmit  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
If Transmit is active (set to any channel), you can select any of the controllers  
shown to the side to transmit MIDI controller messages if they are used in a  
patch.  
Ctl Send  
Ctl Send Selections  
None  
Off  
On  
Knob  
Puls1  
Tri1  
Sine1  
Cos1  
Puls2  
Tri2  
Sine2  
Cos2  
Rand  
Env  
InLvl  
RnLvl  
A/B  
ABTrg  
Pedal  
The display presents two selection fields for mapping the controllers as shown  
below.  
Tog 1-3  
Sw 1-3  
CC 1-31  
CC33-119  
Bend  
MIDI Ctl Send  
Touch  
Vel  
< >  
Knob=CC78  
Last Note  
Low Note  
High Note  
Tempo  
Cmnds  
Gate  
Two fields are available for mapping  
MPX G2 controls to MIDI controllers.  
Trig  
LGate  
ATrg  
BTrg  
TSW  
Toe  
Options: MIDI Reset  
The MPX G2 recognizes the “Reset All Controllers” MIDI message. When  
received, all patched parameters are reset to their stored values. Patched  
parameters may also be reset from the MPX G2 front panel —in System mode  
select Ctl Send from the MIDI menu and press Options, then press Yes. (The  
message will be transmitted from the MPX G2 as well). If you do not want to  
perform the reset, press Options to exit.  
ress Options to  
ccess MIDI Reset.  
Press Yes in response to  
the display prompt to reset all  
patched parameters to their  
stored values. Press Options  
again to return to the MIDI Ctl  
Send menu.  
Ctl Smooth  
The Ctl Smooth parameter is an intelligent filter that provides a smoothing  
function for incoming MIDI data. At 100, the filter is essentially bypassed. With  
decreasingvalues,thefilterbecomes moresluggishinitsresponsetosmallMIDI  
controller value changes while maintaining a fast response to large changes.  
This is useful forsmoothly interpolatingsparseMIDI controller data. As thevalue  
is lowered, the filter's response slows for both large and small MIDI controller  
value changes.  
You can choose to have the MPX G2 transmit MIDI Clock at the current tempo  
rate by setting this control to On and Tempo Source (in the Edit menu) to  
Internal. If this control is set to Off, MIDI Clock will not be transmitted.  
Clock Send  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Syste m Co ntro ls  
Thiscontrol isprovidedforrecordingchangesinasequence,or forcontrolofone  
or more additional MPXG2s. Select On tohavevalues resultingfrom front panel  
operations sent out as System Exclusive messages.  
Automation  
Options: Automation Xmit ID  
Press Options to access theAutomation Xmit ID screen where you canselect  
0-126 to identify the target MPX G2s.  
Press Options to  
ccess Automation  
Xmit ID selection. Press  
Options again to exit.  
SysEx  
ThiscontrolisprovidedforcommunicationwithoneormoreadditionalMPXG2s,  
or computer editor software. On (the default setting) allows System Exclusive  
messages to be received by the MPX G2.  
Options: SysEx Receive Device ID  
Press Options to access the SysEx Receive Device ID screen where you can  
select 0-126 or All to identify the MPX G2.  
ess Options to ac-  
ss SysEx Receive  
Device ID selection. Press  
Options again to exit.  
Soft Thru  
Setting this parameter to On will merge data (Program Change, Continuous  
Controllers and Note messages) received via the MPX G2 MIDI IN port with the  
messagestransmittedthroughtheMIDIOUTport.Thedefaultfor thisparameter  
is Off.  
This control allows you to perform MIDI dumps of Current Pgm, All Programs,  
Map1-3,Chain1-10,Setup1-5.Selectwhicheverofthesecategoriesyouwant,  
and press Store.  
Dump  
Options: Xmit Speed  
Press Options to select one of four MIDI transmission speeds (Slow, Medium  
Slow, Medium Fast and Fast.)  
ress Options to  
elect MIDI transmit  
speed. Press Options  
again to exit.  
NOTE: The Device ID used in dumps is the current Receive Device ID.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Program Change 0-127 can be mapped to any MPX G2 program. Three 128-  
element maps are available. When you select MIDI Maps from the System  
menu, you can select any one of the three maps and make your selections from  
screens like the ones shown below.  
MIDI Maps  
Pgm Maps select:  
< >  
Map 1  
With the map number you want to work with dis-  
playedin thelowerrightof thedisplay,usethe<and  
> buttons to scroll to the mapping screen.  
MIDI Assign Mode  
< >  
Learn  
MIDI Assign mode lets you select Learn or Manual.  
Learn will automatically assign MIDI Program Change messages to any MPX  
G2 programs. (This is great for mapping programs to buttons on a MIDI foot  
controller.)  
Manualallowsyouto"dialin"MIDIProgram Changeassignments.(Thislets you  
set up MIDI Maps with no MIDI gear connected.)  
You can map JamMan controls or  
the MPX G2 front panel buttons  
listed, as well as any MPX G2 pro-  
gram to MIDI Program Change  
messages.  
Select this field to display an MPX G2 pro-  
gram, JamMan or front panel controls.  
1 G2 Blue  
MPX G2 Programs:  
<
Map 1 Pgm# 1  
Program 1  
Select this field to select the MIDI Program  
Change number you want the displayed  
program mapped to.  
Program 300  
JamMan Controls:  
Clear Loop  
Layer  
The MIDI Program number will be learned automatically when MIDI Assign  
Mode is Learn. — Just send a Program Change message from a MIDI  
controller.  
Replace  
Delay  
Start/Stop  
MPX G2 Controls:  
Tap  
IfMIDI Assign Mode isManual, dial in theMIDI Program number withtheknob.  
Bypass  
Gain Bypass  
FX1 Bypass  
FX2 Bypass  
Chorus Bypass  
Delay Bypass  
Reverb Bypass  
EQ Bypass  
Insert Bypass  
Toggle A/B  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Syste m Co ntro ls  
Once you've created maps, you can make them active by setting the DataBase  
sorting option to Show Members of MIDI Maps. (Press Program, then press  
Options.)  
Options: Unchanged, Start at n, Clear Map, and Clear n-n  
Press Options from either of the Map screens to access an additional set of  
controls which allow you to quickly alter map assignments.  
ress Options to  
ccess controls to  
reassign or clear a map.  
Unchanged: Selections made in Options take effect immediately on  
returning to the Map menu. This selection allows you to  
enter and exit Options without effecting any change.  
Start at n: This control allows you to completely reassign a map,  
starting with the program number selected here, and in-  
cluding the next consecutive 127 program numbers.  
Clear Map: This control allows you to completely clear all assignments  
for the active map.  
Clear n-n: This control allows you to completely clear only a specified  
section of assignments for the active map.  
Program Chains  
The MPX G2 has 10 internal program chains, each made up of ten "links". You  
can assign any program to any link in the chain with the controls in this menu.  
A chain can be loaded with a MIDI Program Change message when Members  
of Pgm Chains is the Program mode DataBase sorting option. When the  
Members of Pgm Chains is selected as a DataBase sorting option, use the <  
and > buttons (or MIDI Program Change numbers) to select a chain. Use the  
knob ( or Pgm+/Pgm-) to load programs assigned to the selected chain.  
Onceachainisloaded,thesourceassignedtoPgm+andPgm-willloadthenext  
higher or lower program in thechain. The screensin the Program Chains menu  
allow you to select chains, and make chain and link assignments as shown  
below.  
With the chain number you want to work with  
displayed in the lower right of the display, use  
Chain select:  
the knob or the < and > buttons to scroll to the  
chain assignment screen.  
< >  
Chain 1  
Assign Chain 1  
< > to Pgm#  
Select the MIDI Program Change  
number (1-128) that you want to  
load the chain.  
1
Selecteitherofthesetwofieldstodisplay  
any MPX G2 program number (and the  
correspondingprogramname)onthetop  
line, and the position you want the dis-  
played program to occupy in the chain  
(Link 1-10) on the bottom line.  
1 G2 Blue  
<
Chain 1 Link 1  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Options: Unchanged, Start at n, and Clear chain  
Press Options from any of the Chain screens to access an additional set of  
controls which allow you to quickly alter chain assignments.  
Unchanged: Selections made in Options take effect immediately on  
returning to the Chain menu. This selection allows you to  
enter and exit Options without effecting any change.  
Start at n: This control allows you to completely reassign a chain,  
starting with the program number selected here, and in-  
cluding the next consecutive nine program numbers. This  
is particularly useful for creating chains from your own  
programs.  
Press Options to  
ccess Start at n,  
which allowsyou to quickly  
configure any 10 consecutively  
numbered programs as a Chain,  
and Clear Chain, which removes  
all assignments from the active  
Chain.  
Clear Chain: This control allows you to completely clear all assignments  
for the active chain.  
Selecting any item in the Initialize menu will restore portions of the MPX G2 to  
their factory default settings. These controls allow you to perform a complete  
reset of the unit to its factory defaults, or to reset only selected functions.  
Initialize  
For any displayed selection, the initialization procedure is the same. When a  
selection is displayed, as in the Initialize All example shown below, the Store  
button LED will flash, indicating that the MPX G2 is armed to perform the reset  
procedure.  
Initialize  
All  
Select the initialization option you want.  
TheStorebuttonwillflash.Pressing it  
will display the following message ...  
Are you sure?  
Yes or No  
ress Yes to initialize. Press  
o to cancel the operation.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Syste m Co ntro ls  
PressStore. Thedisplayquery "Are yousure?" prompts youtoselectYes orNo  
as a response. If you don't want to perform the initialization, press No to cancel  
the operation. If you press the front panel Yes button in response to this  
message, the procedure will be performed immediately. The message Init  
Complete indicates that the procedure has been performed.  
Notethat thetimefor reinitializationwill vary, withselectionsincludingDataBase  
reset taking more time.  
The selections in this menu are as follows:  
All:  
Resets all MPX G2 parameters to their original factory settings.  
This will erase all User programs and Setups.  
User pgms only:  
System only:  
Controllers:  
Erases all User programs (program #s 251-300).  
Resets all MPX G2 parameters except User programs.  
Resets the MPX G2 internal controllers (Knob, LFOs, etc.) to their  
default settings.  
Bypass Patches:  
Removes any patches made between Bypass buttons and external  
controllers.  
Global Patches:  
DataBase:  
Clears all global patches.  
Resets DataBase assignments for all programs.  
Thiswill removeDataBaseassignmentsfromprograms251-300.  
MPXG2/R1:  
Resetsthe MPX G2 and anyconnected MPX R1 to the original factory  
settings of all remote parameters such as Bypass Patches, Continu-  
ous Controller assignments, etc.  
This control allows you to clear a single User program, or any number of  
consecutively numbered User programs.  
Clear Programs  
From the Clear Programs screen, press > to display the following screen.  
Clear Programs  
251 to 300  
Twofieldsareavailableforselecting anynum-  
ber of User programs between 251 and 300.  
TheStorebuttonwillflash.Pressing it  
will display the following message ...  
Are you sure?  
Yes or No  
ress Yes to clear the se-  
cted programs. Press No to  
ancel the operation.  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
The Store button LED will flash, indicating that the MPX G2 is armed to perform  
theclear procedure. Press Yes toexecutethe clear operation. Note that this will  
override the Memory Protect function if it is on.  
A displayed message indicates that the clear operation is complete. Press  
System to return to the main System menu.  
Note that if you clear the active program, you can still use it and make  
modificationstoit(includingrestoringit) untilyouloadanotherprogram,atwhich  
time the clear action will take effect.  
This control allows youtocopy asingleprogram, orany number ofconsecutively  
numbered programs into a new location in User memory (program #s 251-300).  
Selectionsyoumakeherewilloverwriteprogramscurrentlyatthelocation(s)you  
designate.  
Copy Programs  
From the Copy Programs screen, press > to display the following screen.  
Two fields are available for selecting  
anynumber of programsbetween 1 and  
300.  
Copy 251 to 300  
Starting at:  
251  
Select the location where you want the first of your selected  
programs to be placed. The remainder of the programs you  
have selected will be placed consecutively after this point.  
TheStorebuttonwillflash.Pressing it  
will display the following message ...  
Are you sure?  
Yes or No  
Press Yes to copy the desig-  
nated programs into the se-  
lected location. Press No to  
cancel the operation.  
The Store button LED will flash, indicating that the MPX G2 is armed to perform  
the copy procedure. Press Yes to execute the copy operation. Note that this will  
override the Memory Protect function if it is on.  
A displayed message indicates that the copy operation is complete. Press  
System to return to the main System menu.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Syste m Co ntro ls  
Ten global patch assignments are available which allow you to assign an  
external controller to the MPX G2 Post Mix or Send and Post Level controls, or  
toindividually control any oneoftheMPXG2Effect Mix orLevel controls. Global  
patches override, but do not clear, program patches with the same parameter  
Destination.  
Global Patches  
From the Global Patches screen, press > to display the following screen.  
Options indicators for both the  
Src and Dst parameters  
Select any patch source from the avail-  
able source list shown here.  
Global Src:  
# 1  
None  
Dst: -----------  
Select the parameter you want to con-  
trol with the displayed Global Src.  
AssignaGlobalPatch  
number (1-10).  
Use the < and > buttons to select one of the display fields shown above. Use  
the knob to assign a source, a destination parameter and a patch number.  
When you've completed your selections, press System to return to the main  
System menu.  
Options: MIDI Learn and Dst Edit  
When Global Source is selected, pressing Options accesses a MIDI Learn  
function which automatically assigns any connected MIDI controller as the  
Source assoonasthecontroller is moved. Onceyouhavemovedthecontroller,  
press Options again to return to the Global Patches display.  
With Global Src selected, press  
Options to access MIDI Learn.  
With Dstselected, pressOptionsto  
select Dst editing parameters.  
When Dst is selected, pressing Options accesses a set of controls which allow  
you to edit all assigned Destinations.  
Unchanged: Selections made in Options take effect immediately on  
returning to the Global Patches menu. This selection  
allows you to enter and exit Options without effecting any  
change.  
Clear All: This control allows you clear all Destination assignments.  
Mix Params: This control allows you to assign Mix parameters to all  
Destinations.  
Level Params: This control allows you to assign Level parameters to all  
Destinations.  
Press Options again to return to the Global Patches display.  
JamMan Note  
Clear Loop  
Layer  
Replace  
Delay  
Start/Stop  
Controls for the JamMan Delay ef-  
fect can also be assigned asGlobal  
Patch Destinations.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Calibrate Pedal This control allows you to achieve full range output of any connected 10k-100k  
continuously variable footpedal.  
From the main System menu, select Calibrate Pedal and press Yes. A display  
promptwillallowyoutochoosetocontinuethecalibrationprocedure,overwriting  
any pre-existing pedal settings, or to discontinue the procedure.  
Pressing Yes in response to the display prompt displays:  
Move pedal from  
min to max . . .  
Move your footpedal from its minimum to its maximum position. 127 should be  
displayed when you reach the maximum point of footpedal travel.  
PressYestosavethecalibratedsettingsandtoreturntotheSystemmenu.Your  
settings will be stored as part of the current Setup.  
Torestricttheactiverangeofapedal,positionthepedalwithinthedesiredrange,  
then select Calibrate Pedal and press Yes. When the display prompts you to  
move the pedal, move it only within the restricted range, then press Yes. Once  
calibrated, any pedal positions below the range will produce pedal controller  
values of 0. Positions above the range will produce values of 127.  
The pedal jack will also work with control voltages as high as 0-10V, or as low  
as 0-1V When prompted to move the pedal, move the control voltage between  
its minimum and maximum values, then press Yes. Refer to Chapter 1: Product  
Overview for pedal wiring information.  
Youcanassignexternal controllers toactivateMaster Bypassand or Bypassfor  
any of the seven effect blocks (Gain, Effect1, Effect2, Chorus, Delay, Reverb or  
EQ) and Insert.  
Bypass Patches  
Use the < and > buttons to select the bypass function: Mstr, Pitch, etc. Use the  
knob to assign the control you want to have activate the selected function. The  
choice of controllers is:  
None (the default setting)  
Tog 1-3  
Sw 1-3  
CC 1-31  
CC 33-119  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Syste m Co ntro ls  
Three controls are available here for customizing the MPX G2 Tuner settings:  
Cal, Offset and Bypass.  
Tuner Mode  
Cal Use this parameter to set the Tuner's "A" pitch. The factory setting is  
A=A. If youchangethis, for example, toA=G, youcantuneyour guitar  
down a whole step — but the open strings will still be displayed as E  
A D G B and E.  
Note: If you change this setting, this will also be used for reference in  
the Diatonic Hmy effect.  
Offset You can fine tune the Tuner's "A" pitch over a range of ±50 cents to  
match a recording or a non-A440 tuning reference.  
Bypass The factory settingof this parameter isMute which turns offthe Send  
andMainOutputswhileyou'retuning.Post Mutemutes only theMain  
Outputsdry guitar is sent out theSendwhiletheTuner is active. All  
Bypass sends dry guitar out both the Send and Main Outputs while  
the Tuner is active.  
TheGlobal Effects modesprovidequick anduseful ways ofchangingtheoverall  
behavior of the G2 to fit specific applications. They allow you to choose to make  
the Speaker Simulator, Noise Gate, Reverb, and Master bypass functions  
universal or program specific.  
Global Effects  
In each case, setting the mode to Global lets the current settings override the  
individual settings stored with each program — a very handy feature if you want  
toturntheSpeaker Simulatoroffforallprogramsbecauseyou’replayingthrough  
a guitar amp and speakers, or if you want to make the Noise Gate active totame  
a 200watt amp cranked to 10.  
When the Speaker Sim, Noise Gate, Reverb and Bypass modes are set to  
Program,eachprogramwillloadwithits ownsettings. Toauditiontheprograms  
as they were intended to be heard:  
1. ConnecttheG2forStandAlone, AmpInput&Effects LooporAmpInputOnly  
application.  
2. Set Speaker Sim, Noise Gate, Reverb and Bypass modes to Program.  
3. Load and listen to the presets for the appropriate application (Amp Input &  
Effects Loop or Amp Input Only).  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Speaker Sim Mode  
When Speaker Sim mode is set to Global, the current settings of the speaker  
simulator override the settings stored with each program.  
If you’re connected to a guitar amp and playing through guitar speakers - you’ll  
want the Speaker Sim turned off in all programs.  
If you’re playing or recording directly into a mixer, you’ll want the Speaker Sim  
turned on (at least for any programs that use Gain Effects).  
When Speaker Sim mode is Global, its settings are not saved with a program  
when it is stored. To save the settings with a program, the mode must be set to  
Program.  
Noise Gate Mode  
SettingNoiseGatemodetoGlobalappliesthecurrentsettingsoftheNoiseGate  
to all programs in the MPX G2. In this mode, you can edit the Noise Gate  
parameters as usual. Note, however, that to save the settings with a program,  
the mode must be set to Program.  
Reverb Mode  
When Reverb mode is set to Global, the reverb settings in the current program  
overridetheindividualreverbsettingsstoredwitheachprogram. Thisallowsyou  
to keep the same reverb while you load different programs. (So, for example,  
when you get the perfect reverb settings with your amp in a particular club - you  
don’t have to edit and store the reverb for every program you plan to use that  
night.)  
With Reverb mode set to Global, you can edit reverb parameters as usual —  
even change algorithms. Note, however, that your reverb settings will not be  
saved when you store the program. To save reverb settings with aprogram, the  
Reverb mode must be set to Program.  
With Reverb mode set to Global, the reverb bypass state also becomes global.  
If you bypass the reverb, it will stay bypassed — even when you load new  
programs — until you make it active again.  
Bypass Mode  
When Bypass mode is set to Global, the current Master bypass state is not  
changed when a new program is loaded. Once bypassed, the MPX G2 will stay  
bypassed until you press Bypass again (even when you load new programs).  
In this mode, the bypass state is not saved with a program when it is stored. To  
save the state with a program, this mode must be set to Program.  
When Bypass mode is set to Program, the Master bypass state stored with a  
program becomes active when the program is loaded. (Just like the individual  
effects bypass states, the Master bypass state can be stored with a program.)  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
MIDI Operation  
Most MPX G2 parameters and all programs can be accessed by MIDI. All MIDI  
applications require theMPXG2to beconnected withoneor more MIDI devices  
with standard MIDI cables via the rear panel MIDI jacks.  
Selecting a  
MIDI Channel  
MIDI controls, such as Transmit and Receive Channel selection are available in  
the System mode MIDI menu. All of these controls are described in Chapter 5:  
System Controls. Several are repeated here for your convenience.  
Before using the MPX G2 with other MIDI devices, all devices must be set to the  
same MIDI channel. To set the MPX G2 to receive MIDI:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Set the controller you will be using (keyboard, sequencer, other MPX G2,  
etc.) to transmit on any MIDI channel (1-16).  
On the MPX G2, press System. Use the knob to scroll to the MIDI menu.  
Use the < and > buttons to select MIDI Receive.  
Use the knob to select OFF, 1-16, or OMNI for receipt of MIDI messages.  
Accessing Programs  
MIDI Out  
MIDI  
Foot Controller  
MIDI In  
Some extremely useful effects can be created by controlling MPX G2 param-  
eters remotely in real time. Almostall ofthecontrollers foundonaMIDI keyboard  
or MIDI foot controller (pitch benders, mod wheels, sliders, switches, breath  
controllers, foot pedals and footswitches) can be used to adjust MPX G2  
parameters. We refer to this real time remote control capability as Dynamic  
MIDI.®  
JamMan NOTE  
When the JamMan effect is loaded  
(Delay block) and the MIDI Clock  
Output parameter (in theSystem:  
MIDI menu) is enabled, a MIDI  
Start message is sent at the end of  
the loop definition. A MIDI Stop  
message is sent when the loop is  
reset or the MuteS(Start/Stop) pa-  
rameter is used. (MIDI Stop on  
mute and MIDI Start on de-mute.)  
Sending a MIDI Program Change message from the controller will load an MPX  
G2register. If any MIDI sourcesareactiveasglobal or general purposepatches,  
moving the appropriate control on the controller will cause the patched destina-  
tionparametertochange. (SeeChapter4:Patching.)If youwanttouseDynamic  
MIDI, but don’t want the MPX G2 to load new registers when you change  
programs on your controller, set your controller so that it doesn't transmit  
Program Change messages, or set MPX G2 Pgm Change to Off in theSystem  
mode MIDI menu.  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Controlling MPX G2  
Tempo Rate  
with MIDI Clock  
MIDI Tempo Control  
MIDI Out (MIDI Clock)  
MIDI In  
Edit mode Tempo Source set to MIDI  
Using the MPX G2 as a  
MIDI Clock Source  
MIDI In  
MIDI Out  
System mode MIDI Clock Send set to On  
Tempo Rate set in Edit mode or by Tap  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Op e ra tio n  
Theconfigurationbelow shows theMIDI connectionsfor controllingtheMPXG2  
simultaneously withMIDI Clocksfrom asequencer, andmessages from another  
MIDI controller. Note that the controller is set to "local control off" and the  
sequencer is set to "echo input".  
MIDI In  
MIDI Thru  
MIDI Out  
MIDI Out  
(MIDI Clock)  
MIDI In  
MIDI In  
Edit mode Tempo Source set to MIDI  
Slaving two or more  
MPX G2s  
Two MPX G2s canbe slaved together by connecting acable from theMIDI OUT  
jack of the master to the MIDI IN jack of the slave. Additional MPX G2s can be  
slavedtothemaster byconnectingacable from theMIDI THRU port ofoneslave  
unit to the MIDI IN port of the next unit.  
MIDI Out  
Master  
System mode MIDI Automation set to On  
MIDI In  
Slave  
System mode MIDI SysEx set to On  
Receive Device ID must match Master Xmit Device ID  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Some synthesizers and controllers cannot send the full range of MIDI program  
change messages (1-128). Others may appear to be able to send only 32, but  
actually have a bank mode that does let you send all 128 program change  
messages. Also, be aware that some MIDI devices use a program numbering  
system that uses 0-127 instead of 1-128. If in doubt, see the manual for your  
controller. See also MIDI Pgm Offset on the following page.  
Controller Quirks  
The Knob,  
Footpedal and  
Footswitch  
as MIDI Controllers  
If the Knob, footpedal, or footswitch is active in the current program, you can  
choose to have the MPX G2 send MIDI Controller messages whenever you  
adjustit. Thismakes itpossibletorecordreal-timecontrol ofMPXG2effectswith  
a MIDI sequencer — a simple but quite powerful way to automate effects.  
To sendMIDI datafrom acontroller, first createapatchusing thecontroller, then  
set System mode MIDI Xmit to the desired MIDI Channel. (The default is  
Channel 1.)  
Once a transmit channel has been set, go to System mode MIDI Ctl Send to  
assign MIDI Controllers. The display will show MPX G2 controllers and param-  
eters in one field, and MIDI controller output selections in another field. (The  
default assignments are None.)  
MIDI Ctl Send  
< >  
Pedal = CC7  
Select the MIDI controller  
you want to transmit.  
SelecttheMPXG2controlyouwantto  
transmit as a MIDI controller.  
The MIDI Controller messages transmitted by MPX G2 controllers can be  
recorded in any MIDI sequencer. Once recorded, they can be played back to  
control the MPX G2 (and other MIDI devices) in real time. To control the MPX  
G2 from recorded controller messages, reassign the patch sources to the  
controller value that was assigned to Ctl Send in the System MIDI menu.  
The procedures for recording footpedal movements on a MIDI sequencer, then  
using the sequencer to control the MPX G2, are given below as an example:  
To transmit pedal moves to the sequencer:  
Create a patch that usesPedal as a source tocontrol the deisred parameter.  
IntheSystemMIDImenu, selectCtlSendandassignPedaltoanycontroller  
(for this example, use CC4.)  
To automate the MPX G2 from the sequencer:  
Change the patch source from Pedal to CC4.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Op e ra tio n  
Reception of MIDI Program Change and Bank Select messages can be  
selectively enabled/disabled from the System mode MIDI menu. The manner  
in which the MPX G2 interprets these messages is determined by the value of  
this parameter as follows:  
Program Change  
Messages  
Pgm Change: Off  
All Program Change and Bank select messages are ignored. Pgm+ and Pgm–  
controllers will load the next higher or lower program in the current bank.  
Pgm Change : On  
Program Change messages 0-99 are recognized. Program Change messages  
100—127 are ignored except when MIDI maps or chains are active.  
Pressing Options from the Pgm Change display allows you to select a Pgm#  
Offset(toallow matchingof MPX1program numbers to another MIDI device) or  
tomap Pgm+and Pgm– controls toload thenext higher or lower program in the  
current bank.  
Controller 32 is used to select Banks.  
Program memory is organized into three banks as follows:  
Program Bank 1  
Program Bank 2  
Program Bank 3  
Preset programs 1-100  
Preset programs 101-200  
User programs 201-250  
Three 128element MIDI maps are storedinternally. Program Change0-127can  
be mapped to any MPX G2 program. When first shipped, the MPX G2 has each  
map load with the following defaults:  
Map 1, 2 or 3  
MIDI 1 = Program 1  
MIDI 128 = Program 128  
Pgm+ and Pgm– will load the next higher or lower program in the map.  
AnyProgramChangenumber canbeselectedtoloadany oneoftencustomized  
effect “chains.” Once a chain is loaded, effects in the chain are accessed by the  
controller patched to Pgm + and Pgm – (program increment and program  
decrement).  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Automation  
SysEx Automation  
TheMPXG2will transmit SysEx automationmessages whentheSystem mode  
MIDI Automation parameter is set to On. Virtually all changes made by front  
panel operations are transmitted asMPXG2 SysEx messages. This is intended  
primarily for use by editor programs and in configurations where it is desirable  
for one or more MPX G2s to be slaved to a single MPX G2 acting as a master.  
The current mode (Program, Edit or System) of the slave does not follow the  
master, but the actual parameter values do. (SysEx automation can also be  
stored on a sequencer and replayed in real-time. As a general rule, automating  
more thantwo or threeSysEx parameter changesatonceis not recommended.)  
To set up the MPX G2 to receive SysEx automation messages from another  
MPX G2, or from a computer editor/sequencer, the transmitting and receiving  
MPX G2s should be set up as follows:  
Transmitting MPX G2: System mode MIDI Automation set to On  
(Default=Off)  
Recieving MPX G2:  
System mode MIDI SysEx Receive set to On  
(Default=On)  
The Receive Device ID of the receiving MPXG2, and theXmit Device ID of the  
transmitting MPX G2 must match. The Receive Device ID is an Option of the  
MIDI SysEx Receive parameter. The Xmit Device ID is an Option of the MIDI  
Automation parameter.  
For applications where it is desirable to "automate" changes made to MPX G2  
effects with its own controls ( the Knob, Footpedal or Footswitch), we recom-  
mend assigning the controllers to MIDI destinations (see Chapter 5: System  
Controls MIDI Send) and recording the MPX G2 MIDI output with a MIDI  
sequencer.  
Controller Automation  
Reset All Controllers  
The MPX G2 recognizes the “Reset All Controllers” message. When received,  
all patched parameters are reset to their stored values, or to the last front panel-  
edited values. Patched parameters may also be reset from the MPX G2 front  
panel —in System mode select Ctl Send from the MIDI menu and press  
Options. (The message will be transmitted from the MPX G2 as well).  
MIDI Clock and The MPX G2 recognizes incoming MIDI clock messages when the Edit mode  
Tempo Source parameter is set to MIDI. Any Delay parameter set to  
echoes:beat, or any LFO parameter set to cycles:beat, will be synchronized to  
the tempo of the incoming MIDI clock.  
Clock Commands  
JamMan NOTE  
When the JamMan effect is loaded  
(Delay block) the loop size will be  
determined by the Beat Value  
(number of beats) and the tempo of  
the incoming MIDI Clock. Like the  
original JamMan device, only one  
Tap is required.  
MIDI Clock and Clock Commands (Start, Stop, Continue) are also available as  
Dynamic MIDI patch sources. The value of MIDI Clock when used as a patch  
source is alinearscalingof0to127(0=41BPMand127=400BPM). The value  
ofClockCommands whenusedas aDynamic MIDI patchsourceis 1for START  
and CONTINUE and 0 for STOP.  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Op e ra tio n  
The following MIDI controllers are available as Dynamic MIDI patch sources:  
MIDI Controllers  
Dynamic MIDI  
1-31, 33-119  
Pitch Bend  
After Touch  
Velocity  
Continuous or switches: 0–127  
0=max flat, 64=no bend, 127=max sharp  
Channel pressure: 0–127  
Note On velocity value of last received note: 1-127  
Note Number value of last received note: 0-127  
Last Note  
High Note  
Note Number value of highest note when more than one note  
is on: 0-127. (Same value as Last Note when only one note is  
on.)  
Low Note  
Note Number value of lowest note when more than one note is  
on: 0–127. (Same value as Last Note when only one note is  
on.)  
Tempo  
MIDI or internal tempo ranging from 41–400 BPM converted to  
a continuous range of 0–127.  
Clock Commands  
Gate  
MIDI Clock commands received as a switch: Start and Con-  
tinue=127, Stop=0  
Generates 127 when any note is on and 0 when all notes are  
released.  
Trigger  
Generates a pulse (0, 127, 0) everytime a Note On is received.  
Legato Gate  
Generates 127 whenever two or more notes are on and 0  
whenever fewer than two notes are on.  
Touch Switch  
Togglesbetween0and 127wheneverAfterTouchrises above  
32 (allowing After Touch to be used as a latching switch).  
These MIDI controllers are also available as threshold sources for several  
modulation parameters such as LFO1 and 2. They may also be used as a tap  
source for controlling Tempo.  
The System mode MIDI menu provides a Dump control which allows selection  
of the following types of bulk data to be dumped directly from the MPX G2 to  
another MPX G2, or to editor/librarian software. Options allows you to select  
MIDI transmit speeds of Slow, Medium Slow, Medium Fast or Fast.  
Bulk Data Dumps  
Displayed Name  
Description  
CurrentPgm  
All Programs  
Map 1-3  
Chain 1-10  
Setup 1-5  
Currently running effect  
Internal Program Change Maps  
Internal Program Chains  
Internal Setups  
With the dump type you want displayed, press Store to transmit the data .  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
MIDI Implementation Chart  
Lexicon MPX G2  
Digital Effects System  
Function  
Transmitted  
Recognized  
Remarks  
Basic  
Default  
1
1
Channel  
Changed  
1-16  
1-16, OMNI  
Mode  
Default  
Messages  
Altered  
Mode 1  
X
Mode 1, 3  
X
X
Note  
Number  
0-127  
0-127  
O
Last Note, Low Note,  
High Note, LGate, Gate,  
Trig used as controllers  
Velocity  
Note ON  
O
used as controller  
Note OFF  
X (Off-9n v=0)  
After  
Touch  
Keys  
Channel  
X
X
X
O
TSW and Touch used  
as continuous controllers  
Pitch Bend  
X
O
used as controller  
Control  
Change  
1-119  
OX  
OX  
1-119 for MIDI transmit  
0, 32 for Bank Select  
Program  
Change  
O
O
0-99=1-100  
O
100-127 ignored in  
Program mode  
0-127 recognized for  
MIDI maps  
Bank Select  
MIDI maps selectable  
via Bank Select  
System  
Exclusive  
Lexicon  
Real-time  
non Real-time  
OX  
X
Device ID  
OX  
X
product ID=15  
Device ID  
Device Inquiry  
System  
Common  
:Song Pos  
:Song Sel  
:Tune  
X
X
X
X
X
X
System  
Real Time  
:Clock  
:Commands  
OX  
X
OX  
OX  
START, STOP and CON-  
TINUE are patchable as  
a switch: START/CON-  
TINUE=127; STOP=0  
Aux  
Messages  
:Local ON/OFF  
:All Notes OFF  
:Active Sense  
X
X
X
X
O
X
:Reset All Controllers  
OX  
OX  
Notes  
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY  
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY  
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO  
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO  
O : Yes  
X : No  
OX: Selectable  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
The Effects and  
Parameters  
The MPX G2 contains a library of 76 effects, each of which is described in detail  
in this section.  
The effects are organized into seven effect types corresponding to the Effect  
Selector buttons on the front panel (Gain, Effect1, Effect2, Chorus, Delay,  
Reverb and EQ). All of the effects available in each category are listed below.  
Effect 1  
Effect 2  
Gain  
Delay  
Reverb  
Chorus  
EQ  
Tone  
Crunch  
Screamer  
Overdrive  
Distortion  
Preamp  
SweepFilter  
1-Band (M)  
Wah 1  
Detune (M) DigiDrive1  
Panner  
Delay (M)  
Delay (S)  
Delay (D)  
Echo (M)  
Echo (S)  
Echo (D)  
Looper  
Chamber  
Hall  
Plate  
Ambience  
Gate  
1-Band (M)  
2-Band (M)  
3-Band (M)  
4-Band (M)  
1-Band (S)  
2-Band (S)  
1-Band (D)  
2-Band (D)  
Fc Splitter  
Crossover  
Volume (M)  
Volume (S)  
Volume (D)  
PedalVol  
Chorus  
Detune (S)  
Auto Pan  
Tremolo (M)  
Tremolo (S)  
UniVybe  
CustomVybe  
Phaser  
DigiDrive2  
Detune (M)  
Flanger (M)  
Flanger24 (M)  
Flanger (S)  
Rotary Cab  
Aerosol  
Detune (D) OctaBuzz  
Wah 2  
Shift (M)  
Shift (S)  
Shift (D)  
SweepFilter  
1-Band (M)  
Wah 1  
Pedal Wah1  
Pedal Wah2  
Volume (M)  
Volume (S)  
Volume (D)  
PedalVol  
ExtPedalVol  
Test Tone  
Click  
SplitPreamp  
DiatonicHmy  
Panner  
Auto Pan  
Tremolo (M)  
Wah 2  
Pedal Wah1 OrangePhase  
Pedal Wah2 RedComp  
Volume (M)  
JamMan  
Ducker  
Orbits  
Centrifuge1  
Centrifuge2  
Comb 1  
BlueComp  
DigiDrive1  
DigiDrive2  
OctaBuzz  
Tremolo (S) Volume (S)  
UniVybe  
CustomVybe PedalVol  
Volume (D)  
Comb 2  
Volume (M)  
Volume (S)  
Volume (D)  
PedalVol  
Phaser  
ExtPedalVol  
OrangePhase  
RedComp  
BlueComp  
Test Tone  
Click  
ExtPedalVol  
ExtPedalVol  
Lightedeffectbuttons indicatewhicheffectblocksareactiveandturnedoninthe  
currently loaded program. (Effects can be active, i.e. available for use in a  
program, but bypassed and, therefore, "off".) To identify the particular effect  
which is running, press and hold any of the effect buttons. A message informs  
you if the effect block is active, or not. The name of the particular effect in use  
in an active block is identified by name.  
To access the edit parameters of any active effect, press Edit, then select the  
effect by pressing the appropriate button. Use the knob and the < and > buttons  
to select and modify the effect parameters. PressEdit again to return tothe Edit  
menu. See Chapter 3: Editing for more information.  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Different effects requiredifferent amounts ofMPXG2processing. Thefollowing  
notes should be kept in mind when creating new combinations of effects in a  
program.  
Notes on  
Combining Effects  
All Reverb and Gain effects have dedicated processing and can be used in  
combination with any other effect. (You can always add these to any MPX G2  
program.) In addition, the Noise Gate and Speaker Simulator don’t share  
resources with the effects and are, therefore, always available.  
The other effects (Effect1, Effect2, Chorus, Delay and EQ) share processing  
"steps". The total number of available steps is 190. This means that some  
combinations of these effects may not be possible –depending on which effects  
are already loaded.  
When you scroll through the effects for a given block, the size (in steps) of each  
effect is shown in the upper right hand corner of the display. If the effect will fit  
in the current progam, anasterisk (*) is displayed next toits name andthe Effect  
button will flash rapidly. If the effect will not fit, an “x” is displayed, and the Effect  
button light will turn off.  
Whenyoustopscrolling,aresourceusagemessageisdisplayedbrieflyshowing  
how many steps are available and how many steps have been used.  
Notes on  
Controlling Effect  
Parameters  
AnyeffectparameterintheMPXG2canbepatchedforrealtimecontrol.Insome  
cases, audible artifacts may be produced, depending on the particular param-  
eter and the rate and range of control. In many effects, we’ve added additional  
processingpowertoparametersthatare obviouscandidatesfordrasticdynamic  
control. These parameters are “interpolated” to produce extremely smooth,  
noise free control.  
It is often possible to compensate for a non-interpolated parameter, such as  
Effect 1 Detune Level, by combining the effect block with one with an interpo-  
lated Level parameter, such as Effect 2 Volume.  
In the following effect descriptions, a bar showing the processing requirements,  
in steps, of each effect in relation to the total possible number of steps (190) is  
shown at the end of each description.  
Notes on  
the Effect  
Descriptions  
Interpolatedparameters are indicated byanasterisk (*) following theparameter  
name.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
Gain Effects  
Tone  
Tone is a set of analog Tone  
controls which can be used as a  
clean-boost stomp box in front of  
your amp, or as a simple clean  
preamp when the MPX G2 is used  
without an external guitar amp.  
When used as a stomp box, Tone  
can radically alter the sonic char-  
acter of you guitar amp, providing  
analternativechannel.Whenused  
without an external amp, Tone can  
sculptsomedramaticcleansounds.  
Try boosting Lo and Hi while cut-  
ting Mid to produce acoustic-like  
timbres from a single coil neck  
pickup.  
Lo  
± 25dB  
Clean low frequency boost/cut  
Clean mid frequency boost/cut  
Clean high frequency boost/cut  
Input level (headroom)  
Mid  
Hi  
+12/-25dB  
± 25dB  
InLvl  
Level  
-64 to 0dB  
0dB to 64dB  
Output level  
0
190  
NO PROCESSING STEPS USED  
Crunch  
Crunch is an overdrive effect  
withseparatedrivecontrolsforlow,  
mid and high frequencies. De-  
signed to be used like a stomp box  
(infrontofyouramp),Crunchworks  
well in combination with other pre-  
gain effects like wah, phase shift,  
compression, and octave fuzz.  
Lo  
±25dB  
Low frequency Drive  
Mid frequency Drive  
Mid  
Hi  
±25dB  
0-50dB  
High frequency Drive  
Input level (Drive sensitivity)  
InLvl  
-64 to 0dB  
0
190  
Level  
0dB to 64dB  
Output level  
NO PROCESSING STEPS USED  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Screamer  
Screamer is an analog model  
of a vintage Tube Screamer over-  
drive (powered by a fresh carbon-  
zinc battery). Care has been taken  
to make the behavior of this effect  
accurate both sonically and elec-  
tronically. The ranges of Drive and  
Tone match those of the vintage  
effectandit willpushyouramp into  
high gear just like the original.  
We’ve also added Lo, Mid and Hi  
tone controls. For truly authentic  
sounds, leave them set flat (zero),  
but feel free to dial in some addi-  
tional colors unobtainable with the  
original.  
Lo  
± 5dB  
±5dB  
Low frequency boost/cut  
Mid frequency boost/cut  
High frequency boost  
Amount of overdrive  
High frequency roll-off  
Output level  
Mid  
Hi  
0-5dB  
0-40  
Drive  
Tone  
Level  
0-25  
0dB to 64dB  
0
190  
NO PROCESSING STEPS USED  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
Overdrive  
A more aggressive overdrive  
effectthanScreamer,Overdrive is  
designed to be used as a stomp  
box — to push a clean amp chan-  
nelintobluesy overdrive,ortotake  
a high-gain amp channel over the  
top. Lo, Mid and Hi controls pro-  
videaconsiderableamountofgain.  
InLvl determines overall Drive  
sensitivity. When cranked up, Lo,  
Mid and Hi behave like individual  
distortion controls. When throttled  
backto -15dBorso,Lo,MidandHi  
behave more like traditional EQ  
controls.  
Lo  
± 15dB  
±15dB  
0-15dB  
-64 to 0dB  
0-20  
Low frequency boost/cut  
Mid frequency boost/cut  
High frequency boost  
Mid  
Hi  
InLvl  
LoCut  
Feel  
Drive  
Tone  
Level  
Input level (Drive sensitivity)  
Pre-Drive low frequency roll off  
Overdrive dynamics  
0-64  
0-40  
Amount of overdrive  
0-25  
High frequency roll-off (Post-Overdrive)  
Output level  
LoCut rolls off low frequencies  
beforethey hit theoverdrivecircuit  
(and your amp). This can be very  
usefulifyourstagesoundismuddy  
and you need to cut through the  
band.  
0dB to 64dB  
TheFeelparameterisaunique  
featureofLexicon’sDynamicGain  
analog alogrithms. In this effect, it  
mimics the subtle changes in dis-  
tortion dynamics caused by differ-  
ent power supplies. When set to 0,  
theamountofcompression/distor-  
tion produced during the attack of  
notesisrelatively constant.Asthis  
value is increased, you’ll notice a  
difference in the feel of the attack  
when using overdrive and moder-  
ate amounts of distortion. The first  
attack of a phrase of rapid picking  
is a bit cleaner and has more bite  
thanthosethat follow.This mimics  
the different “power sag” enve-  
lopes characteristic of different  
stompboxpowersources.0corre-  
sponds to the uniform response of  
an AC adapter (9V). Values 1-32  
approximate the increasinglly dy-  
namicresponsesproducedbyvari-  
ous batteries — from a fresh alka-  
line battery (9.3V), to a fresh car-  
bon-zinc battery (9.8V). Values  
above 32 mimic tube-rectified  
power supplies.  
Tone provides high frequency  
roll-off after the overdrive stage.  
Level should be used to compen-  
sate for gain added by InLvl, the  
Tone controls and Drive.  
0
190  
NO PROCESSING STEPS USED  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Distortion  
NeedmorethanjustOverdrive?  
Distortion provides more than  
100dB of analog gain — and it has  
anadditionalsetofBassandTreble  
controls following the distortion  
stage. Although not based on any  
particular pedal, this effect has a  
sonic kinship with several classic  
distortion pedals and fuzz boxes.  
Lo  
-25dB to +18dB  
-25dB to +18dB  
0-18dB  
Low frequency Drive  
Mid frequency Drive  
High frequency Drive  
Amount of distortion  
High frequency roll-off  
Post-Drive bass control  
Post-Drive treble control  
Output level  
Mid  
Hi  
Drive  
Tone  
Bass  
Trebl  
Level  
0-50  
0-25  
± 25dB  
± 25dB  
0dB to 64dB  
0
190  
NO PROCESSING STEPS USED  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
Preamp and SplitPreamp  
Lo  
± 25dB  
±25dB  
0-50dB  
-64 to 0dB  
0-20  
Low frequency boost/cut  
Mid frequency boost/cut  
High frequency boost  
Input level (Drive sensitivity)  
Pre-Drive low frequency roll off  
Overdrive dynamics  
Mid  
Hi  
InLvl  
LoCut  
Feel  
Drive  
Tone  
Bass  
Trebl  
Level  
0-64  
0-60  
Amount of overdrive  
0-35  
High frequency roll-off  
Post-Drive bass control  
Post-Drive treble control  
Output level  
± 25dB  
± 25dB  
0dB to 64dB  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
Unlike the other MPX G2 Gain effects, Preamp was not designed to function as  
a stomp box to use in front of your amplifier. It is a fully featured, programmable  
analog guitar preamp. Use Preamp for stand-alone applications (direct record-  
ing without an amp, or to drive a power amp and cabs). When using Preamp for  
direct recording, be sure to turn on the Speaker Simulator (Edit Select, Speaker  
Sim, Simulator: On).  
InLvl (Input Level) determines the amount of clean headroom the preamp has.  
The setting of this single control will have a great impact on the overall behavior  
and sound of the preamp. At higher values, the preamp will distort very easily  
forexample, withaMidtonecontrolboostofonly5dB.Atlowerlevels,thetone  
controls behave more like EQ controls — making low, mid and high guitar  
frequencies louder (or softer) without adding distortion.  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
As a general guideline, set InLvl to approximately -15dB when working on clean  
or crunch sounds. Use higher values when you’re going for more over-the-top  
distortion.  
As with any preamp, a little  
time taken to learn how the  
controls interact with one an-  
other will pay off when you’re  
searching for "the sound".  
Be aware that this preamp can produce well over 120dB of analog gain.  
Dependingonthesettings of InLvl and Drive, the threetonecontrols will behave  
like EQs or distortion controls. Unlike many preamps, these controls are active  
— meaning that they can boost the signal (add gain) as well as cut it. Each  
control can add up to 25dB of gain boost. Pay attention to the total amount of  
boost — in most cases, a little goes a long way.  
Oneofthefundamentaldis-  
tinctions between different  
types of preamps is how clean  
or dirty it is. This distinction is  
generally determined by the  
preamp’s input sensitivity —  
which roughly translates to  
“How hard do I have to hit this  
thing to make it break up?” In  
most preamps this attribute is  
fixed for each channel. (The  
clean channel is less sensitive  
than the lead channel.)  
TheLoCut control is usedtoroll-offlow endbefore hittingthedrive sectionofthe  
preamp. The higher the value, the fewer low frequencies in the distortion. This  
control can be helpful in removing “mud” from high gain sounds, allowing them  
to stand out in a mix.  
The Feel parameter is a unique feature of Lexicon’s Dynamic Gain analog  
alogrithms. In the Preamp effect, Feel is used to model the subtle changes in  
distortion dynamics caused by different types of power-amp rectifier circuits.  
When set to zero, the amount of compression/distortion produced during the  
attack of notes is relatively constant. As this value is increased, you’ll notice a  
differencein the feel of theattackof notesandchords when usingoverdriveand  
moderate amounts of distortion. The first attack of a phrase of rapid picking is  
a bit cleaner and has more bite than those that follow. This mimics the different  
“power sag” envelopes that are characteristic of different power amp rectifier  
circuits. A setting of 0 corresponds to the uniform response of a tight, solid state  
rectifier cricuit. Values between 1 and 32 produce increasingly dynamic  
responses- but are generally within therealm ofthoseproducedbypower amps  
withsolid-staterectifiiers.Valuesabove32aremoreinkeepingwiththedynamic  
feel produced by tube -rectified power amps.  
The tone controls of a  
preamp’s clean channel gen-  
erally behave like EQ controls  
on a mixer. They make  
changes in what we hear as  
bright, dark and warm without  
adding distortion. It’s a differ-  
ent story when you adjust the  
tonecontrolsofmanypreamps’  
lead channel. On these, the  
tone controls interact with the  
gain section and changing the  
tone settings will often make  
significant changes to the dis-  
tortion characteristics of the  
sound. In the lead channel of  
many preamps, the Mid con-  
trol can be used as a distortion  
control. Turn it up to add more  
distortion — down to make the  
sound cleaner.  
Drive sets the amount of overall gain in the preamp. The cleanest sounds are  
produced with Drive set to 0. Distortion increases as the value of Drive is  
increased.  
Tone is a post-distortion high frequency rolloff control. Use it to control the high  
frequency harmonics generated by the distortion. As Bass and Treble are also  
post-distortion, they can further shape the sound by cutting or boosting top and  
bottom without affecting the distortion.  
The analog Preamp effect  
in the MPX G2 has all of these  
attributes. Because it is com-  
pletely programmable, it is not  
limited to clean or lead chan-  
nelswithfixedinputsensitivity.  
Careful adjustment of its pa-  
rameters can yield many tonal  
variations from clean and  
slinky, to blues overdrive and  
beyond, to a high gain roar.  
Level is the master volume for the entire preamp. Use it to compensate for gain  
cut or boost added by the combination of InLvl, the Tone controls and Drive.  
When going for high gain sounds, lower the Level control to compensate for  
increases in InLvl and Drive. A good way to set the Level control is to press the  
Gain button to bypass the preamp so you can match the Preamp level with the  
bypass level.  
Split Preamp is the same analog effect as Preamp, except that it has a built-in  
parallelpaththatfeedsthedirect,cleanguitartotheMPXG2’spost-gainsection.  
This allows you to create programs that have preamp and right channel direct  
guitar sounds simultaneously.  
0
190  
NO PROCESSING STEPS USED  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Effect descriptions for all of the effects contained in Effect1 and Effect2 are combined in  
this section.  
Effect1 and Effect2  
Effect1 and Effect2 contain identical effects, except for the first seven effects in Effect1.  
These are Pitch effects: Detune (M), (S)and (D), Shift(M), (S) and(D) and Diatonic Hmy.  
In these effects, Tune controls the amount of pitch shift. The Optimize parameter (an  
option of Tune) allows balancing of any artifacts vs. the amount of delay through the  
effect. Higher settings of Optimize are good for chords and low notes, lower settings  
minimize the delay through the effect.  
Detune (M), Detune (S) and Detune (D)  
Detune effects are useful for  
Detune (M)  
Detune (S)  
thickening up sounds by adding  
delayed/pitch shifted versions of  
the original source. They can be  
particularly effective when used to  
simulate double-tracking. They  
are also great alternatives to cho-  
rus effects as a detuner can add  
the richness of a chorus effect  
without the audible sweep caused  
by the chorus rate. Detuners are  
also traditionally used to turn a six-  
string guitar into a twelve-string, or  
an in-tune piano into a honky-tonk.  
The MPX G2 detuners are opti-  
mizedtoprovideveryfineamounts  
of pitch shift.  
Detune (D)  
Detune (M) is a single-channel  
detuner that creates a pair of sig-  
nals, pitch-shifted up and down  
from the input. The pair is always  
mixed together, and presented  
equally to the outputs.  
Detune (S) creates a pair of sig-  
nals, pitch-shifted up and down  
from the inputs. The left and right  
channels are separate.  
Detune (D) sums left and right  
inputs to mono,then creates two  
pairs of signals, pitch-shifted up  
anddownfromtheinputsbyTune1  
and Tune 2. The first pair goes out  
the left, the second pair out the  
right.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Pitch shift  
Tune, Tune1, 2 0-100  
(Optimize)  
10-60ms (M), (D)  
10-40ms (S)  
An option of Tune 1 — Adjusts the amount of delay in  
the tuner  
P Dly  
0-70ms (M), (D)  
0-25ms (S)  
Amount of delay before the onset of the effect  
As the detune effects use up relatively few processing resources, they can be combined with  
reverb and many other effects. When creating effects that don’t require pitch shifting by large  
intervals (semitones) the detuners are the most efficient choice.  
29  
190  
Detune (M)  
34  
190  
Detune (S)  
43  
190  
Detune (D)  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
Shift (M), Shift (S) and Shift (D)  
Shift (M)  
Shift (S)  
The pitch shift effects are de-  
signed to provide both fine (1 cent  
resolution) and coarse (semitone  
resolution) pitch shift effects. Use  
them to create harmonizations,  
detuning, or special effects. The  
Tune parameters can be glided  
smoothly across their entire  
range. Try controlling Tune with a  
foot pedal or MIDI controller for  
“whammy-bar” and pedal steel ef-  
fects.  
Shift (D)  
Shift (M) is a single-channel  
pitch shifter.  
Shift (S) is a stereo version of  
Shift (M) with synchronized  
crossfades.  
Shift (D) provides mono input to  
two independent pitch shifters  
controlled by Tune1 and Tune 2.  
The first shifter goes to the left  
output, the second to the right out-  
put.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
-4800 to +1900 cents  
0-100  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Pitch shift  
Tune  
(Optimize)  
Glide  
Adjusts the amount of delay in the pitch shifter  
Coarse, fine resolution of pitch shift  
Off, On  
67  
190  
190  
These effects use more processing resources than the detuners. Shift (S) and Shift (D) are  
among the largest effects in the MPX G2.  
Shift (M)  
73  
Shift (S)  
96  
190  
Shift (D)  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Diatonic Hmy  
DiatonicHmy is an “intelligent”  
pitch shifter. The effect will auto-  
matically shift the pitch of an in-  
coming monophonic notes to the  
correct harmony note in the se-  
lected key and scale. You select  
the key and scale — (E major, A  
minor, etc.) and harmony interval  
(up a 3rd, down a 6th, etc.). When  
anoutofkeynoteisdetected,itwill  
be shifted by the same interval  
amount as the last in-key note.  
Note the pitch detector can use  
either the Guitar Input or Return  
Inputs as the source for pitch de-  
tection.ThedefaultisGuitarInput,  
which allows the detector to ana-  
lyze a clean, unprocessed guitar  
signal — even if you want to shift  
the guitar audio after it has been  
processed by one or more effects.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level*  
Key  
Off, -89dB to +6dB  
C to B  
Amount of effect in processed signal  
Pitch root of scale  
Scale  
Major, Dorian, Phyrgian,  
Lydian, Mixolydian,  
Minor, Locrian  
Type of scale  
Int  
-2Oct to Oct+ 5th  
0-100  
Harmony Interval  
(Optimize)  
Thrsh  
(Src)  
Sets the amount of delay in the pitch shifter  
Sets the level above which the pitch detector tracks  
Selects the audio input used for pitch analysis.  
-83dB to 0dB  
Guitar In, Returns Input  
96  
190  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
Panner  
The Panner effect has the left in-  
put panned to outputs with Pan 1,  
right input with Pan 2. Because all  
the parameters of this effect are  
interpolated, this can be used to  
add interpolated outputs to effects  
which have non-interpolated out-  
put levels.  
Mix*  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level*  
Pan 1*  
Pan 2*  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
50L to C to 50R  
50L to C to 50R  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Left input panner  
25  
190  
Right input panner  
Auto Pan  
Auto Pan is a version of Panner  
with the pans controlled by a local  
LFO. The left input is panned by  
the LFO’s sine output. The right  
input is panned by the cosine out-  
put, which is offset by 0°, 90°,  
180°or270°by thePhase param-  
eter.  
Mix*  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level*  
Rate*  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Pan rate or period ratio  
0-50Hz or  
1:24-24:1 cycles/beat  
(Rate Units)  
PW*  
Selects frequency or cycles/beat  
Pan pulse width  
0-100%  
0-100%  
0°-270°  
Depth*  
Phase  
Pan depth  
25  
190  
Phase difference between right and left pan  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Tremolo (M) and Tremolo (S)  
Tremolo (M)  
Tremolo (S)  
In Tremolo (M), the left and right  
inputs are mixed together, then a  
local sinewave generator modu-  
lates the volume.  
In Tremolo (S) the left input is  
modulatedbyalocalsinewavegen-  
erator before going to the left out-  
put.Therightinput ismodulatedby  
sin, cos, -sin, or -cos, depending  
on the Phase parameter.  
These are the smallest mono  
andstereoeffectswithinterpolated  
output level controls. You can use  
them (with the tremolo turned off)  
to add smooth output level control  
to a stereo effect that doesn’t have  
output level interpolation.  
Mix*  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level*  
Rate*  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Tremolo rate or period ratio  
0-50Hz  
1:24-24:1 cycles/beat  
(Rate Units)  
PW*  
Selects frequency or cycles/beat  
Tremolo pulse width  
0-100%  
0-100%  
0°-270°  
Depth*  
Phase  
Tremolo depth  
17  
190  
In Tremolo (S), controls the phase difference between the  
right and left tremolo  
Tremolo (M)  
13  
NOTE: Mix is interpolated in Tremolo (S) only.  
190  
Tremolo (S)  
UniVybe  
Univybe is a recreation of a vin-  
tageUni-Vibe.TheUni-Vibe,origi-  
nally intended for use with elec-  
tronic organs (as a replacement  
for rotating speakers), became an  
essential effect for many guitar-  
ists. Its dreamy swirling sound has  
becomeadefiningelementofmany  
Hendrix live and studio recordings  
(alsousedbyRobinTrower,David  
Gilmore, Audley Freed and many  
others).  
Our version is modeled on a  
vintage Uni-Vibe set to “chorus”  
with depth turned up all the way.  
The Rate control matches the  
range, and slightly wobbly shape  
of the original speed control. To  
get the classic effect, put a slow  
UniVybeinfrontofyourguitaramp,  
settheampforamoderateamount  
ofgainandplaytheopeningchords  
to “Little Wing”. You’ll find that that  
theeffectismorepronouncedwhen  
youplaycleanandthatitfadesinto  
the background as your tone gets  
more distorted.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Rate  
0ff, -89dB to +6dB  
0-100  
Amount of effect in processsed signal  
Univybe rate  
70  
190  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
CustomVybe  
This custom version of Univybe  
has additional parameters with  
extended ranges. The Rate can  
be set to any speed from 0-50Hz.  
It can also be set in cycles/beat,  
allowing you to tap in the sweep  
rate. When Depth is set to 100%,  
the effect is about twice as pro-  
nounced as the original. PW al-  
lows adjustment of the sweep  
waveshape between sine (50%),  
sawtooth (0%) and ramp (100%)  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Rate  
0ff, -89dB to +6dB  
0-50Hz or  
Amount of effect in processsed signal  
Custom Vybe rate or period ratio  
1:24-24:1 cycles/beat  
0-100%  
PW  
Custom Vybe pulse width  
Custom Vybe depth  
70  
190  
Depth*  
0-100%  
Phaser  
ThePhasereffectisasimulated  
Mutron phaser.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Rate  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Phaser rate or period ratio  
0-50Hz or  
1:24-24:1 cycles/beat  
(Rate Units)  
PW  
Selects frequency or cycles/beat  
Phaser pulse width  
0-100%  
Depth*  
Res  
0-100%  
Phaser depth  
77  
190  
-100 to +100%  
Amount of feedback from output of filters to inputs  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
OrangePhase  
Thesoundandrateofthisphase  
shifter are modeled on a vintage  
MXR Phase 90 stomp box — a  
signature component of the early  
Van Halen sound.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Rate*  
0ff, -89dB to +6dB  
0-100  
Amount of effect in processsed signal  
OrangePhase rate  
77  
190  
Red Comp  
Red Comp is our take on the  
classicDyna Comp stomp box.It is  
a simple compressor with fixed ra-  
tio, threshold and time constants  
(eachmatchedtotheoriginal).The  
amount of compression is set with  
the Sense control. The higher the  
valueofSense,themorethesignal  
is “squashed.”  
Red Comp has lots of uses. It is  
generally used in front of the amp.  
Withclean sounds,it canaddextra  
attack and sustain. Use it in front of  
an overdriven preamp to keep  
notes in the sweet spot without  
spilling over into too much distor-  
tion when you play hard.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Sense  
0ff, -89dB to +6dB  
0-100  
Amount of effect in processsed signal  
Sensitivity (Pre-Compressor level)  
61  
190  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
Blue Comp  
Blue Comp is a recreation of  
another popular compression  
pedal, the CS-3. Like the CS-3 it  
has variable Sustain (Sense),  
Threshold (Thrsh), Gain, Attack  
(ATime) and Release (RTime) pa-  
rameters.Theseversatilecontrols  
make it flexible enough to be used  
with many different styles and any  
type of guitar (including acoustic  
and bass). Blue Comp is useful in  
front of an amp or in the effects  
loop. Follow a Chorus or Detune  
effect with Blue Comp to produce  
achime-likeeffectalaAndySum-  
mers with Police. In fact, you can  
use two at once. For example,  
connect two in series in front of an  
overdrive for super smooth sus-  
tain that's perfect for slide playing.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Sense  
Thrsh  
Gain  
0ff, -89dB to +6dB  
-72dB to +24dB  
-83dB to 0dB  
-72dB to +24dB  
0-2000 ms  
Amount of effect in processsed signal  
Sensitivity (Pre-Compressor level)  
Gain reduction threshold  
Post-Compressor level  
Attack time  
ATime  
RTime  
0-2000 ms  
Release time  
49  
190  
DigiDrive1 and DigiDrive2  
The DigiDrive 1 and 2 effects  
combine digital distortion with 3-  
band tone controls. In DigiDrive1,  
the tone controls are in front of the  
distortion. In DigiDrive 2, the tone  
controls follow the distortion. The  
distortion produced by these ef-  
fects is not meant to mimic analog  
distortion, but to provide an alter-  
native sound. (Think “digital fuzz  
box.”). The next time you’re look-  
ing for an in-your-face fuzz effect,  
pump one of these into your amp.  
You might be surprised at what  
comes out.  
DigiDrive1  
DigiDrive2  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Drive  
Low  
Mid  
0ff, -89dB to +6dB  
0-100  
Amount of effect in processsed signal  
Amount of digital distortion  
-72dB to +24dB  
-72dB to +24dB  
-72dB to +24dB  
Pre-Drive low frequency cut/boost  
Pre-Drive mid frequency cut/boost  
Pre-Drive high frequency cut/boost  
56  
190  
High  
DigiDrive1  
53  
190  
DigiDrive2  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
OctaBuzz  
OctaBuzz is a very simple effect  
that mimics the “full wave rectifier”  
circuit used in many octave fuzz  
pedals, like the Octavia. Another  
signature Hendrix effect, (Purple  
Haze, Who knows, etc.) it is not a  
pretty sound, and requires a little  
effort to make it sing.  
Playsinglenotesabovethe 12th  
fret to get a screaming tone an  
octave higher. Single bass notes  
can produce ring modulator-like  
sounds. Double-stops and chords  
producewierdelectronichash.Like  
the original, the effect is quite dy-  
namicyoucangetawidevariety  
of sounds just by changing your  
pick attack.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
0ff, -89dB to +6dB  
Amount of effect in processsed signal  
In general, the effect is more  
prominent with lighter playing.  
OctaBuzz is most effective in front  
of other distortion effects and the  
guitaramp.Inmanyoftherecorded  
classic octave fuzz performances,  
the distortion controls of the stomp  
box were turned down. (Distortion  
was added by the guitar amp, or by  
an additional distortion pedal after  
the ocatve fuzz pedal.) Try insert-  
ingthe ScreamerorDistortion gain  
effectsbetweenOctaBuzzandyour  
amp to get the full bore sound.  
Hendrix sometimes put a wah be-  
tween the octave fuzz and the dis-  
tortion — you can too.  
15  
190  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
SweepFilter  
SweepFiltersimulatesaMoog-  
type resonant low-pass filter. Cut-  
off frequency and output level are  
interpolated, and can be swept.  
The performance of this filter is  
high enough that it can be used as  
a lowpass filter for hiss reduction.  
The parameters were de-  
signed to allow synthesizer-like  
control of the filter. For example:  
Use FC like the manual “cutoff”  
knob of an analog synth – set it to  
the filter frequency desired when  
allmodulationsources areatmini-  
mum.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level*  
Fc*  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
20-20000Hz  
1-100  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Corner frequency offset of filter  
Filter resonance: 7=a maximally flat filter  
added to corner frequency offset to produce corner frequency  
scales Mod  
FRes*  
Mod*  
Scale*  
Pan*  
Use Mod as the patch destina-  
tionforasmanyasfivemodulation  
sources (LFO, Rand, Env,  
LastNote, etc.).  
20-20000Hz  
-100 to +100%  
50L to C to 50R  
Left/right pan control  
Use Scale as a master depth  
control for all modulation sources.  
92  
190  
1-Band (M)  
The 1-Band (M) effect provides  
a single band of double-precision  
parametricEQwithadjustable cen-  
ter frequency, Q, boost/cut and  
filter type (low shelf, band, high  
shelf).  
Mix  
Level  
Gain  
Fc  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
-72 to +24dB  
20-20000Hz  
0.1-10.0  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Boost/cut gain of filter  
Center or corner frequency of filter  
Q of filter  
Q
50  
190  
Mode  
LShlf, Band, HShlf  
Determines EQ type  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Wah 1, Wah 2 and PedalWah1, PedalWah2  
Wah is a mono wah filter mod-  
eled after two classic wah-wah  
pedals. With Sweep selected,  
press Options to select Model C  
(CryBaby) or Model V (Vox).  
These models capture both the  
characteristic signature and non-  
linear pedal response of the origi-  
nal pedals. Bass allows you to  
change the wah from a band-pass  
type to a low-pass type effect by  
progressively adding more low  
end. (Try it with bass and key-  
boards.) Resp controls how  
quickly the wah responds to  
changes of Sweep. (100 is very  
fast, 0 is very, very slow).  
Wah 1  
Wah 2  
PedalWah1  
PedalWah2  
To make a Mutron-like enve-  
lope filter, patch sweep to Env.  
Use Resp to control the effect’s  
responsiveness to changing dy-  
namics.  
TomakeanAutoWaheffect,try  
patching Sweep to an LFOsine or  
triangle wave.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Amount of effect in processsed signal  
Level  
Sweep  
(Type)  
Bass  
Resp  
Gain  
0ff, -89 to +6dB  
0-100  
Wah center frequency (available only in Wah 1 & Wah 2)  
C= Crybaby, V = Vox  
Wah 2 uses the same vintage  
wahsasWah1withabuilt-incom-  
pressor following the wah. (All of  
the compression parameters are  
fixedand,therefore,invisible.)The  
compressor smooths out some of  
the peakiness that can occur in  
different portions of the sweep,  
while at the same time adding  
some sustain and punch to the  
overall effect. The end result is a  
wah that cuts through when you  
kick it on.  
C, V  
0-100  
Adds low frequency boost to the wah  
Responsiveness to changes in sweep  
Post-Wah cut/boost  
0-100  
-72dB to +24dB  
ThePedalWaheffectsareiden-  
tical to Wah 1 and Wah 2 except  
theSweepparameterishard-wired  
to the Foot Pedal input on the  
MPX G2 rear panel. If you are  
using the MPX R1 MIDI Remote  
Controller, these effects will be  
automatically connected to the  
control pedal — you don’t have to  
make any patches — just load the  
effect and start playing.  
41  
190  
190  
Wah 1 or PedalWah1  
71  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
Wah 2 or PedalWah2  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
Volume (M), Volume (S) and Volume (D)  
The Volume effects can be  
placed in front of, or behind, other  
effect blocks to provide smooth  
level control through a 95dB  
range. You can use them for dy-  
namic input or output control, EQ  
input trim (helpful when adding  
large amounts of gain with an EQ  
effect), stereo to mono mixer,  
crossfadecontrols,volumepedal,  
etc.  
Volume (M)  
Volume (S)  
Volume (D)  
In Volume(M) the left and right  
inputs are mixed together, then  
sent to both outputs through a vol-  
ume control.  
In Volume (S) the left and right  
inputs are sent through a ganged  
pair of volume controls.  
In Volume (D) the left and right  
inputs are sent through indepen-  
dent volume controls.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level*  
Vol*  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
0-100%  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
17  
190  
190  
190  
Voume (M)  
13  
Volume (S)  
18  
Voume (D)  
PedalVol and ExtPedalVol  
PedalVol is the same as Vol-  
ume(S),excepttheVolparameter  
is hardwired to the Foot Pedal in-  
put on the MPX G2. When using  
the MPX R1 MIDI Remote Con-  
troller, this parameter is automati-  
cally connected to the R1’s built-in  
pedal. This means that no patch-  
ing is required to create a volume  
pedal effect.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
ExtPedalVol is hardwired to the  
External Pedal input of the MPX  
R1, allowing you to easily create  
programs with both a Volume and  
Wah pedal available simulta-  
neously.  
Level*  
0ff, -89dB to +6dB  
Amount of effect in processsed signal  
13  
190  
PedalVol and ExtPedalVol  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Test Tone  
Test Tone is an audio sine wave  
generatorwithitsoutputquantized  
to correspond with the pitches of a  
chromatic scale (A = 440 Hz) over  
a nine-and-one-half octave range.  
It is provided primarily as a conve-  
nient way of generating test tones  
and tuning references.  
Bal controls the relative level of  
left and right output attenuation.  
When Bal=-50, the left output has  
no attenuation, and the right out-  
put is fully attenuated. When  
Bal=0, neither output is attenu-  
ated. When Bal=+50, the left out-  
put is fully attenuated and the right  
output has no attenuation. Level  
and Bal can be patched to a global  
LFO to get tone bursts, etc. Pitch  
accuracy is better than 1/4 cent.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level*  
Note  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
C0-G10  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Sine wave pitch, expressed as MIDI notes  
(0=C0, 127=G10)  
Bal*  
-50 to +50  
A4=440Hz  
Relative level of left and right output attenuation  
Handy pitches:  
D#0=19.445Hz  
B5=987.77Hz  
D#8=4978Hz  
D#9=9956Hz  
33  
190  
Click  
This effect is a simple metro-  
nome which is automatically con-  
nected to Tap. Press Tap twice to  
set the tempo.  
This effect can be used as an  
inputsourceforauditioningreverbs  
and delays. It is also a convenient  
timing reference for the JamMan  
effect, where the click is automati-  
callymuteduntiltheloopistapped.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Click ratio  
Amount of Click in processsed signal  
Level  
0ff, -89dB to +6dB  
14  
190  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
Thechoruseffectsaregenerallyusedtoenhanceasoundbymodulatingdelaytimesand/  
or frequency content in various ways. Of course, the classic effects of this type : Chorus,  
Flanger and Phaser are all here – along with several other variations such as: Rotary  
Cab, Aerosol, Orbits, Centrifuge, Comb 1 and Comb 2.  
Chorus Effects  
All of the Chorus effects have one or two resonance parameters. These parameters  
control the level and phase of the effect output signal that is recirculated into the effect  
inputs. Use care when adjusting these parameters, as they can cause overload (or  
feedback-like howls) if they are set too high — even with little or no input signal present.  
As a general rule, the combined value of any resonance parameters should always be  
less than 100 — but pay close attention to levels whenever the total resonance is above  
50. If you use high resonance values (to produce a deep flange effect, for example) and  
the clip LEDs light, try turning down the level of the effect thatprecedes the Chorus block.  
Chorus  
This is a true stereo, multi-voice  
chorus. Use it to enrich guitars,  
keyboards, etc. It has Dual 2-tap  
modulators with cross resonance.  
The Pulse Width controls allow  
independent adjustment of the  
waveshape. (At 0, the sinewave  
becomes a sawtooth with a fast  
rise and slow fall.) The Depth con-  
trols provide adjustment of the  
chorus from 0-100%.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Rate1  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Left and right A rate  
0-50Hz or  
1:24-24:1 cycles/beat  
(Rate1 Units)  
PW 1  
Selects frequency or cycles/beat  
Left and right A pulse width  
Left and right A depth  
0-100%  
0-100%  
Dpth1*  
Rate2  
0-50Hz or  
Left and right B rate  
1:24-24:1 cycles/beat)  
(Rate 2 Units)  
PW 2  
Selects frequency or cycles/beat  
Left and right B pulse width  
Left and right B depth  
0-100%  
Dpth2*  
Res 1  
0-100%  
-100 to +100  
-100 to +100  
Left to right resonance  
60  
190  
Res 2  
Right to left resonance  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Detune (M)  
Detune effects are useful for  
thickening up sounds by adding  
delayed/pitch shifted versions of  
the original source. They can be  
particularly effective when used to  
simulate double-tracking. They  
are also great alternatives to cho-  
rus effects as a detuner can add  
the richness of a chorus effect  
without the audible sweep caused  
by the chorus rate. Detuners are  
also traditionally used to turn a six-  
string guitar into a twelve-string, or  
an in-tune piano into a honky-tonk.  
The MPX G2 detuner is optimized  
to provide very fine amounts of  
pitch shift.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
0-100  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Pitch shift  
Tune  
(Optimize)  
10-35ms  
An option of Tune — Adjusts the amount of delay in  
the tuner  
P Dly  
0-35ms  
Amount of delay before the onset of the effect  
As the detune effects use up relatively few processing resources, they can be combined with  
reverb and many other effects. When creating effects that don’t require pitch shifting by large  
intervals (semitones) the detuners are the most efficient choice.  
Detune (M) is a single-channel  
detuner that creates a pair of sig-  
nals, pitch-shifted up and down  
from the input. The pair is always  
mixed together, and presented  
equally to the outputs.  
29  
190  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
Flanger (M), Flanger24 (M) and Flanger (S)  
Originally, flanging effects were  
created by simultaneously playing  
twoidenticalprogramsontwotape  
recorders, then using hand pres-  
sure against the flange of the tape  
reels to slow down first one ma-  
chine, then the other. The result  
was a series of changing phase  
cancellations and reinforcements,  
providing a comb filter and a char-  
acteristic swishing, tunneling and  
fading sound.  
Flanger (M) and Flanger24 (M)  
Flanger (S)  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
In the MPX G2, the Flanger ef-  
fects are two-tap delays. The first  
tapisfixed,andthesecondsweeps  
past it. Mixing the two taps to-  
gether creates a flanging effect. In  
Flanger (M), the moving tap is  
swept with an internal LFO.  
In the stereo version, Flanger  
(S), the delays are modulated by  
two sine waves from the same  
LFO. The phase relation between  
the two waves is set by the Phase  
parameter.  
Level*  
Rate  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Flange rate or period ratio  
0-50Hz or  
1:24-24:1 cycles/beat  
(Rate Units)  
PW  
Selects frequency or cycles/beat  
Flange pulse width  
0-100%  
0-100%  
0°-270°  
Depth*  
Phase  
Flange depth  
In Flanger (S) sets the phase difference between the right  
and left flangers  
Res  
-100 to +100  
0-100%  
Resonance  
Blend  
Amount of fixed tape mixed with moving tape  
Flanger24 (M) is a higher preci-  
sion (32-bit) flanger with identical  
parameters to Flanger (M).  
29  
190  
Flanger (M)  
42  
190  
Flanger24 (M)  
47  
190  
Flanger (S)  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Rotary Cab  
This effect simulates a Leslie  
speaker with one pair of stereo  
mics on the rotating low-frequency  
drum, and another pair on the ro-  
tatinghigh-frequencyhorn.Balsets  
the relative mix of Drum and Horn  
mics. Width controls the stereo  
spread of both pairs of mics. Rate  
and Depth 1 control the speed and  
depthoftherotatinglow-frequency  
drum. Rate 2 and Depth 2 control  
thespeed anddepth ofthe rotating  
high-frequency horn. The preset,  
Rotary Cab, is set up so that A/B  
switches the speed from fast to  
slow. Different A and B rates are  
used to simulate the inertia of the  
mechanical system.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level*  
Rate1  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Drum rate or period ratio  
0-50Hz or  
1:24-24:1 cycles/beat  
(Rate1 Units)  
Dpth1*  
Selects frequency or cycles/beat of drum  
Drum depth (tremolo)  
0-100%  
Rate2  
0-50Hz or  
1:24-24:1 cycles/beat  
Horn rate or period ratio  
(Rate2 Units)  
Dpth2*  
Res  
Selects frequency or cycles/beat of horn  
Horn depth (tremolo)  
0-100%  
76  
190  
-100 to +100  
0-100%  
Resonance  
Width*  
Bal  
Panning width for horn and drum  
Relative level of horn and drum  
-50 to +50  
Aerosol  
Aerosol is a true stereo chorus/  
flanger with dual rate, depth and  
resonance controls. It can pro-  
duce very deep resonant flange  
sweeps, subtle multi-vibrato, ste-  
reo image enhancement and a  
wide variety of other chorus and  
flanger-like effects.  
A pair of single-tap modulated  
delays is each modulated by a  
separateLFO. PulseWidth allows  
independentadjustmentofleftand  
right LFOs from full left to full right  
skew.(At0,thesinewavebecomes  
a sawtooth with a fast rise and  
slow fall.) Depth controls provide  
adjustment of modulated depth  
from 0-100%.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Rate1  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Left Mod rate or period ratio.  
0-50Hz or  
1:24-24:1 cycles/beat  
(Rate 1 Units)  
PW 1  
Selects frequency or cycles/beat  
Left Mod pulse width  
0-100%  
0-100%  
Dpth1*  
Left Mod depth (tremolo)  
Right Mod rate or period ratio.  
Rate2  
0-50Hz or  
1:24-24:1 cycles/beat  
(Rate 2 Units)  
PW 2  
Selects frequency or cycles/beat  
Right Mod pulse width  
Right Mod depth (tremolo)  
Cross resonance  
0-100%  
Dpth2*  
Res1  
0-100%  
-100 to +100  
-100 to +100  
Res2  
Resonance  
59  
190  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
Orbits  
Orbits processes the left and  
right inputs independently with a  
pair of modulated delay/auto  
panners. This effect can be used  
to create spatial effects via a com-  
bination of Doppler and level pan-  
ning.  
In the Orbits effect, Pulse Width  
controlsallowindependentadjust-  
ment of left and right LFOs from  
full left to full right skew. (At 0, the  
sinewave becomes a sawtooth  
withafastriseandslowfall.)Depth  
controlsprovideadjustmentofMod  
andPandepthfrom0-100%.Width  
allows adjustment of the panning  
depth from 0 (mono) to 100 (maxi-  
mum stereo spread).  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level*  
Rate1  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Left Mod and Pan rate or period ratio  
0-50Hz or  
1:24-24:1 cycles/beat  
(Rate 1 Units)  
PW 1  
Selects frequency or cycles/beat  
Left Mod and Pan pulse width  
0-100%  
Sync1  
-120° to +120°  
0-100%  
Phase difference between left LFO Mod and Pan  
Left Mod and Pan depth  
Dpth1*  
Rate2  
0-50Hz or  
1:24-24:1 cycles/beat  
Right Mod and Pan rate or period ratio  
57  
190  
(Rate 2 Units)  
PW 2  
Selects frequency or cycles/beat  
Right Mod and Pan pulse width  
Phase difference between right LFO Mod and Pan  
Right Mod and Pan depth  
Resonance  
0-100%  
Sync2  
-120° to +120°  
0-100%  
Dpth2*  
Res  
-100 to +100  
0-100%  
Width*  
Panning width  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Centrifuge1 and Centrifuge2  
Centrifuge1  
The Centrifuge effects have a  
pair of modulated left and right  
delays routed into a single auto  
panner. In these effects, mod and  
panrateanddepth(Rate1,Depth1)  
aremodulated by anadditional set  
of rate and depth controls (Rate2,  
Depth2). These can create unique  
chorus and flanger effects with  
complex, undulating modulation  
rhythms.  
Centrifuge2  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level*  
Rate1  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Left Mod and Pan rate or period ratio  
0-50Hz or  
1:24-24:1 cycles/beat  
(Rate 1 Units)  
PW 1  
Selects frequency or cycles/beat  
Left Mod and Pan pulse width  
0-100%  
Sync1  
-120 to +120  
0-100%  
Phase difference between left LFO Mod and Pan  
Left Mod and Pan depth  
Dpth1*  
Rate2  
0-50Hz or  
Right Mod and Pan rate or period ratio  
1:24-24:1 cycles/beat  
35  
190  
190  
(Rate 2 Units)  
PW 2  
Selects frequency or cycles/beat.  
Right Mod and Pan pulse width  
Phase difference between right LFO Mod and Pan  
Right Mod and Pan depth  
0-100%  
Centrifuge1  
43  
Sync2  
-120 to +120  
0-100%  
Dpth2*  
Res  
-100 to +100  
Resonance  
Centrifuge2  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
Comb 1 and Comb 2  
Comb 1  
The Comb effects work by com-  
bining the original input signal with  
a micro-delayed version. The tiny  
delay difference between the two  
signals causes certain frequen-  
cies to be cancelled or reinforced  
when the two are combined. The  
result is a highly colored version of  
the original source. The coloration  
can be “tuned” with the Comb  
(Comb1)or Depth(Comb2). Low  
and High pass filters are included  
so you can limit the frequency  
bandinwhichthecombingoccurs.  
Comb 1 is a mono comb with  
single-polelowand high cutfilters.  
There are two ways to get the  
comb effect. The first is to set mix  
to100%(wet),thensetNotchto50  
or -50. This essentially creates a  
band-limited signal (limited by  
LoCutandHiCut)whichisthenrun  
through a comb. You can also set  
mix= 50%, Lvl = 0dB, and Notch=  
+100.Inthiscase,theband-limiter  
is part of the comb. In this version,  
the effect produces shallower  
notch depths outside the band-  
limit region.  
Comb 2  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
LoCut  
HiCut  
Comb  
Notch  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
100-10000Hz  
100-10000Hz  
0-100  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Corner frequency of the low cut filter  
Corner frequency of the high cut filter  
A microdelay which positions the notch  
Increases the audibility of the notch  
Ratio of filter and delay output levels:  
-100 to +100  
Notch  
Filter Output Mod DelayOutput  
Comb 2 is a dual mono comb  
with a second tap, controlled by a  
single LFO with adjustable phase.  
The phase relation between the  
two waves can be adjusted be-  
tween 0-270°.  
-100  
-50  
0
50  
100  
0%  
-100%  
-100%  
0%  
100%  
100%  
100%  
0%  
100%  
100%  
Rate  
0-50Hz or  
Mod rate or period ratio (Comb 2 only)  
1:24-24:1 cycles/beat  
(Rate Units)  
PW  
Selects frequency or cycles/beat (Comb 2 only)  
Mod pulse width (Comb 2 only)  
Mod depth (Comb 2 only)  
35  
190  
0-100%  
Depth*  
Res  
0-100%  
-100 to +100  
0°-270°  
Resonance (Comb 2 only)  
Comb1  
51  
Phase  
Phase difference between the right and left Mod  
(Comb 2 only)  
190  
Comb2  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Volume (M), Volume (S) and Volume (D)  
The Volume effects can be  
placed in front of, or behind, other  
effect blocks to provide smooth  
level control through a 95dB  
range. You can use them for dy-  
namic input or output control, EQ  
input trim (helpful when adding  
large amounts of gain with an EQ  
effect), stereo to mono mixer,  
crossfadecontrols,volumepedal,  
etc.  
Volume (M)  
Volume (S)  
Volume (D)  
In Volume(M) the left and right  
inputs are mixed together, then  
sent to both outputs through a vol-  
ume control.  
In Volume (S) the left and right  
inputs are sent through a ganged  
pair of volume controls.  
In Volume (D) the left and right  
inputs are sent through indepen-  
dent volume controls.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level*  
Vol*  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
0-100%  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
17  
190  
190  
190  
Voume (M)  
13  
Volume (S)  
18  
Voume (D)  
PedalVol and ExtPedalVol  
PedalVol is the same as Vol-  
ume(S),excepttheVolparameter  
is hardwired to the Foot Pedal in-  
put on the MPX G2. When using  
the MPX R1 MIDI Remote Con-  
troller, this parameter is automati-  
cally connected to the R1’s built-in  
pedal. This means that no patch-  
ing is required to create a volume  
pedal effect.  
ExtPedalVol is hardwired to the  
External Pedal input of the MPX  
R1, allowing you to easily create  
programs with both a Volume and  
Wah pedal available simulta-  
neously.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level*  
0ff, -89dB to +6dB  
Amount of effect in processsed signal  
13  
190  
PedalVol and ExtPedalVol  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
The Delay effects include delay, echo, looping and ducking effects. Delays are high  
quality digital delays. Echoes are similar to delays, but low-pass filters have been added  
to simulate the high-frequency rolloff that occurs naturally in acoustic echoes and in  
echoes created with analog tape.  
Delay Effects  
All MPX G2 Delay effects allow you to choose how delay times will be displayed. Select  
any Time parameter and press Options. The following choices are available for each  
Time parameter:  
ms: time is displayed as milliseconds (delay time is fixed)  
feet: time is displayed as feet – the equivalent distance from a sound  
source required to produce the delay (delay time is fixed)  
meters: time is displayed as meters – the equivalent distance from a sound  
source required to produce the delay (delay time is fixed)  
echoes/beat: time is displayed as a rhythmic ratio of echoes per beat (delay time  
varies with Tempo and can be changed at any time by pressing TAP  
twice.)  
TAP ms: time is displayed as milliseconds (new delay value can be “tapped in”  
when this Time value is displayed for editing).  
Another feature shared by all MPX G2 Delay effects is Fbk Insert. This option of the  
feedback parameter allows you to route the outputs of another effect block to the delay’s  
feedback input. If the other block is after the delay block, Fbk Insert will place it inside the  
delay/echo feedback loop. This powerful feature is the key to obtaining many classic  
effects.  
7-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Delay (M), Delay (S) and Delay (D)  
Delay (M) is a simple mono de-  
lay with feedback.  
Delay (M)  
Delay (S)  
Delay (S) is a simple stereo de-  
lay with feedback.  
Delay (D) is a dual delay with  
feedback, crossfeedback, inde-  
pendent output level adjusts, and  
panners.  
Delay (D)  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Time  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Delay time  
0-20000ms (M)  
1:24-24:1echo/beat,  
0-22600 ft, 0-6880 M  
(in stereo and dual versions, 0-10,000ms, 0-11300ft,  
0-3440 M)  
(Time Units)  
Lvl 1*  
Selects ms, note, feet, meters, or Tap ms  
In Delay (D), controls left delay output level  
In Delay (D), controls right delay output level  
In Delay (D), controls left delay output panner  
In Delay (D), controls right delay output panner  
Left feedback level  
Off, -95 to 0dB  
Off, -95 to 0dB  
50L to C to 50R  
50L to C to 50R  
-100 to +100%  
Lvl 2*  
Pan 1*  
Pan 2*  
17  
190  
190  
190  
Fbk 1  
(Fbk insert)  
Effect1, Effect2,Chorus, The outputs of the selected source are scaled by Fbk  
Delay,Reverb,EQ  
Delay (M)  
23  
Fbk 2  
-100 to +100%  
-100 to +100%  
Right feedback level  
XFbk1  
In Delay (D), controls level from left feedback source to  
right delay in  
Delay (S)  
40  
XFbk2  
Clear  
-100 to +100%  
Off, On  
In Delay (D), controls level from right feedback source to  
left delay in  
When On, mutes and resets the delay  
Delay (D)  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
Echo (M), Echo (S) and Echo (D)  
The Echo effects are similar to  
theDelay effects,exceptthefeed-  
back inputs are sent through 1-  
pole low-pass filters.  
Echo (M)  
Dampprovidescontroloverthe  
cutoff frequency of the filter. (In-  
creasing Damp lowers cutoff fre-  
quency.)  
Echo (S)  
Echo (D)  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Time  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Delay time in mono version  
0-20000ms  
1:24-24:1echo/beat,  
0-22600 ft, 0-6880 M  
(Time Units)  
Time1  
Selects ms, note, feet, meters, or Tap ms  
Left delay time  
0-10,000ms  
1:24-24:1echo/beat,  
0-11,300 ft, 0-3440 M  
(Time1 Units)  
Time2  
Selects ms, note, feet, meters, or Tap ms  
Right delay time  
0-10,000ms,  
1:24-24:1echo/beat  
0-11,300 ft, 0-3440 M  
(Time2 Units)  
Lvl 1*  
Selects ms, note, feet, meters, or Tap ms  
In Echo (D) controls left delay output level  
In Echo (D) controls right delay output level  
Left feedback level  
21  
190  
190  
190  
Off, -95 to 0dB  
Off, -95 to 0dB  
-100 to +100%  
Lvl 2*  
Echo (M)  
31  
Fbk 1  
(Fbk insert)  
Effect1, Effect2,Chorus, The outputs of the selected source are scaled by Fbk  
Delay,Reverb,EQ  
Fbk 2  
-100 to +100%  
0 to +100%  
0 to +100%  
Off, On  
Right feedback level  
Echo (S)  
40  
Damp1  
Damp2  
Clear  
Cutoff frequency of low-pass filter in left feedback path  
Cutoff frequency of low-pass filter in right feedback path  
When On, mutes and resets the delay  
Echo (D)  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Looper  
In the Looper effect InMix con-  
trols the ratio of input to feedback  
into the delay. This parameter is  
ducked by the input level, so that  
louder signals route the input sig-  
nal into the delay, and softer sig-  
nalsroute thefeedbacksignal into  
the delay. When Sense is at 0, no  
duckingwilloccur.At100theinput  
will be ducked by even the lowest  
input levels.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Time  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Delay time  
0-20000ms  
1:24-24:1echo/beat  
0-22600 ft, 0-6880 M  
(Time Units)  
InMix  
Selects ms, note, feet, meters, or Tap ms  
0-100%  
Ratio of input to feedback going into the delay  
(Fbk insert)  
Effect1, Effect2,Chorus, The left output of the selected source is scaled by Fbk  
Delay, Reverb,EQ  
Sense  
Pan  
0-100  
Sensitivity of InMix to input amplitude  
Output panner  
50L to C to 50R  
0-100  
Rls  
Envelope release time constant  
Envelope attack time constant  
When On, mutes and resets the delay  
29  
190  
Atk  
0-100  
Clear  
Off, On  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
JamMan  
is an automatic  
phrasesamplerthat  
incorporates many of the features  
of the original Lexicon JamMan.  
To create a simple loop, press  
Tap once when you want to start  
recording. (You can record up to  
20 seconds — while recording, a  
meter showing the remaining  
memory is displayed automati-  
cally.) Press Tap a second time to  
stoprecordingandbeginplayback  
of the loop.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
TheJamManeffectcansynchro-  
nize to an external MIDI Clock as  
well as to the MPX G2 internal  
clock. This makes it possible to  
synchronize your loops with any  
MIDI drum machine or sequencer.  
TosynchronizetheJamManloop  
with effects that use rates set for  
cycles/beat, set the Tempo Beat  
Value (in the Edit menu) to the  
number of beats you want to loop.  
The JamMan effect has several  
special parameters that allow you  
tostop, restartand modify the loop  
in real time: Clear, Layer, Replc,  
Delay, and Mute. Each of these  
has only two values, On or Off - so  
they can easily be controlled via  
external footswitches or MIDI.  
We’ve created some example  
presets to demonstrate how these  
features work. See Amp Input &  
FX Loop programs 95-99, Amp  
Input Only programs 145-149 and  
Stand Alone programs 245-248.  
Level  
Size  
0ff, -89dB to +6dB  
Amount of effect in processsed signal  
0-20,000ms  
-100 to +100%  
Off, On  
Loop size in ms (display only, this is set by pressing Tap)  
Feedback level (defaults to 100% while looping)  
Mutes and resets the loop when On  
Fbk  
Clear  
Layer  
Replc  
Delay  
MuteS  
Off, On  
Adds new material on top of loop while On  
Replaces existing loop with new material while On  
Turns looper into mono delay while On  
Mutes loop while On, restarts from beginning when Off  
Off, On  
Off, On  
Off, On  
JamMan parameters can also be controlled with MIDI Program Change  
messages when MPX G2 Program mode: Option is set to Show members of  
MIDI Maps. (See MIDI Pgm Maps in Chapter 5: System Controls.)  
25  
190  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Ducker  
Similar to Looper, with the wet  
output getting quieter as the input  
gets louder. When Sense is at 0,  
no ducking will occur. At 100 the  
input will be ducked by even the  
lowest input levels.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Time  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Delay time  
0 -20,000ms  
1:24-24:1echo/beat  
0-22,600 ft, 0-6880 M  
(Time Units)  
Fbk  
Selects ms, note, feet, meters, or Tap ms  
Feedback level  
-100 to +100%  
(Fbk insert)  
Effect1,Effect2,Chorus, The left output of the selected source is scaled by Fbk  
Delay,Reverb,EQ  
Sense  
Rls  
0-100  
0-100  
Off, On  
Amount of ducking  
Envelope release time constant  
When On, mutes and resets the delay  
Clear  
28  
190  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
Reverb Effects  
The MPX G2 Reverb effects provide a full suite of reverberation and ambience  
algorithms. All of the reverbs are true stereo in that differerent processing is applied to  
the left and right input signals. Dedicated processing resources are allocated to the  
reverb effects so that you can always load any reverb into any program, regardless of  
what other effects are loaded. The MPX G2's Global Reverb function allows reverb tails  
to ring out through program changes. (See Global Effects in Chapter 5: System  
Controls.)  
Chamber  
The Chamber effect produces  
an even, relatively dimensionless  
reverberation, with little change in  
color as the sound decays. The  
initial diffusion is similar to the Hall  
effect, but the sense of space and  
size is much less obvious. This  
characteristic, along with the low  
colorofthedecaytailmakesCham-  
ber useful on a wide range of ma-  
terial.Itisespecially usefulonspo-  
ken voice, giving a noticeable in-  
crease in loudness with very low  
color.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Size  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
4.0-35.0 meters  
Off, On  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Length of Chamber  
Link  
Scales Decay and Spred with Size  
Increase of initial echo density over time  
Delay inserted before the onset of reverberation  
Reverb time for low frequency signals  
Reverb time for mid frequency signals  
Frequency of transition from Decay to Bass  
High frequency content of Decay  
Contour of the reverberation envelope  
Sustain of reverberation after initial build up  
Diff  
0-100%  
P Dly  
Bass  
Decay  
Xover  
Rt HC  
Shape  
Spred  
0-250ms  
0.2-4.0x  
0.07-65.4s  
30Hz to 24.7kHz, Full  
525Hz-24.7kHz, Flat  
0-255  
0
190  
0-255  
NO PROCESSING STEPS USED  
Hall  
The Hall effect emulates a real  
concert hall. The reverberation is  
very clean, and designed to re-  
main behind the direct sound —  
adding ambience, but leaving the  
sourceunchanged.Thiseffecthas  
arelativelylowinitialdensitywhich  
builds up gradually over time.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Size  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
20-76.0 meters  
Off, On  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Length of Hall  
Link  
Scales Decay and Spred with Size  
Increase of initial echo density over time  
Delay inserted before the onset of reverberation  
Reverb time for low frequency signals  
Length of the reverb tail  
Diff  
0-100%  
P Dly  
Bass  
Decay  
Xover  
Rt HC  
Shape  
Spred  
0-250ms  
0.2-4.0x  
0.12-65.4s  
30Hz to 24.7kHz, Full  
525Hz-24.7kHz, Flat  
0-255  
Frequency of transition from Decay to Bass  
High frequency content of Decay  
Contour of the reverberation envelope  
Sustain of reverberation after initial build up  
0-255  
0
190  
NO PROCESSING STEPS USED  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Plate  
Plateeffectswereoriginallygen-  
eratedbylarge,thinsheetsofmetal  
suspended upright under tension  
on springs. Transducers attached  
totheplatewouldtransmitasignal  
which would, in turn, vibrate the  
plate. Because the plate provided  
a denser medium than air, sounds  
broadcast through it would seem  
to be ocurring in a large open  
space.  
ThePlateeffectsynthesizes the  
sound of metal plates, with high  
initial diffusion and a relatively  
bright, colored sound. This effect  
is designed to be heard as part of  
the music, mellowing and thicken-  
ing the initial sound. It is a popular  
choice for enhancing popular mu-  
sic, particularly percussion.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Size  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
4.0-76.0 meters  
Off, On  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Length of room  
Link  
Scales Decay and Spred with Size  
Increase of initial echo density over time  
Delay inserted before the onset of reverberation  
Reverb time for low frequency signals  
Length of the reverb tail  
Diff  
0-100%  
P Dly  
Bass  
Decay  
Xover  
Rt HC  
Shape  
Spred  
0-250ms  
0.2-4.0x  
0.07-65.4s  
30Hz to 24.7kHz, Full  
525Hz-24.7kHz, Flat  
0-255  
Frequency of transition from Decay to Bass  
High frequency content of Decay  
Contour of the reverberation envelope  
Sustain of reverberation after initial build up  
0-255  
0
190  
NO PROCESSING STEPS USED  
Ambience  
The Ambience effect gives  
warmth, spaciousness and depth  
to a performance without coloring  
the direct sound, and is commonly  
used to add a room sound to re-  
corded music or speech. The ef-  
fect simulates reflections from  
room surfaces, with random re-  
flections, a gradual decay of over-  
all level, and a gradual narrowing  
of the bandwidth. DTime settings  
can be varied to create larger or  
smaller spaces while variations of  
DLvl and Rt HC correspond to the  
hardness of the imaginary reflect-  
ing surfaces and the effects of air  
absorption on the high end of the  
sonic spectrum.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Size  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
4.0-76.0 meters  
Off, On  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Length of room  
Link  
Scales DTime with Size  
Diff  
0-100%  
Increase of initial echo density over time  
Delay inserted before the onset of reverberation  
Length of the ambience tail  
Level of the ambience tail  
P Dly  
DTime  
D Lvl  
Rt HC  
0-250ms  
0.07-65.4s  
Off, -48dB to Full  
0.5-21.2kHz  
High frequency content of DTime  
0
190  
NO PROCESSING STEPS USED  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
Gate  
Gate is a reverb effect with a  
fairly constant sound and no de-  
cay until the reverb is cut off  
abruptly. This effect works well on  
percussionparticularlyonsnare  
and toms, but be sure to experi-  
ment with other sound sources as  
well.  
The Mix, P Dly and Rt HC pa-  
rametersareveryimportantinthis  
effect, allowing you to create any-  
thing from an enhancement or  
subtle thickening, to a solid wall of  
reverb.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Time  
Link  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
140-700ms  
Off, On  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Reverb time for mid and low frequency signals  
Scales Spred with Size  
Diff  
0-100%  
Increase of initial echo density over time  
Delay inserted before the onset of reverberation  
Determines low frequency envelope shape  
Determines mid and high frequency envelope shape  
Frequency of transition from LoSlp to Slope  
High frequency content of Slope  
P Dly  
LoSlp  
HiSlp  
Xover  
Rt HC  
Shape  
Spred  
0-250ms  
-16 to +16  
-16 to +16  
30Hz to 24.7kHz, Full  
525Hz-24.7kHz, Flat  
0-255  
Contour of the reverberation envelope  
Sustain of reverberation after initial build up  
0
190  
0-255  
NO PROCESSING STEPS USED  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
At its simplest, equalization is the process of cutting and boosting certain  
frequencies to make portions of program material more or less audible. This is  
generally accomplished by combining filters which affect a specific “band” of  
frequenciestogether withgain controls.Thethreetypes offilters commonly used  
to perform basic EQ functions are: High Cut, Low Cut and Bandpass/Notch.  
EQ Effects  
High cut filters remove frequencies above a fixed level. As this allows frequen-  
cies below the threshold to pass through unchanged, high cut filters are also  
commonly referred to as “lowpass” filters.  
High Cut  
Low cut filters, which remove frequencies below a fixed level and allow higher  
frequencies to pass through are also known as “highpass” filters.  
Bandpass/Notchfilters allow only a certain rangeof frequenciestopassthrough  
without attenuation. They are plotted as curves, with a peak (or dip in the case  
of notch filters) at the center frequency.  
Low Cut  
Shelf filters  
When a specific frequency value is selected for cutting or boosting, and  
compensating gain controls are provided, a shelving filter is created, with  
gradual build up of the boost or cut to the selected frequency, followed by a  
levelingoffbeyondtheselectedfrequency. Whentheeffect ofthefilter is plotted,  
it resembles a shelf, with constant levels of boost or cut preceding and following  
the “knee” or “corner point” at the selected frequency.  
A typical application of these filters uses 2-band equalization with two shelf  
filters, one low and one high, to provide bass and treble tone control. These two  
filters affect only the high and low frequency signals, leaving the center  
frequencies unaltered. Adding a third or fourth band of equalization in the form  
of midrange bandpass filters provides more control over those frequencies  
where hearing is most sensitive, and where most of the energy in music exists.  
(500Hz-4kHz). Thesemidrangebandspeak, or dip, at acenter frequency which  
can be varied to provide much greater control over different aspects of the  
sound, allowing for bass ortreble rolloff todecreaseboominess, thickensounds,  
reduce noise, or increase brightness.  
Bandpass/Notch  
High Shelf  
Parametric EQ  
Parametric equalizers provide boost and cut controls, sweepable center fre-  
quencies, andadjustment ofQ”, or thebroadness or sharpnessoftheEQcurve  
alloftheparametersofequalization.Thisabilitytobroadenornarrowthepeak  
at certain frequencies allows specific sounds to be accented or diminished with  
minimal effect on adjacent frequencies. As all equalization has potentially  
adverse side effects on program material, this ability to precisely adjust only  
specific frequencies has the advantage of minimizing the amount of EQ applied  
toprogram material. It alsoallows thecreationofspecific effects suchassharply  
narrowed EQ curves (notches) which are useful for feedback control or removal  
of specific noise artifacts.  
Low Shelf  
7-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
EQ Tips (for tweakers only)  
About “Q”  
Q is a measure of the sharpness of  
an EQ curve. The larger the Q value,  
the sharper the curve. In some situa-  
tions it is convenient to think of Q in  
termsofbandwidthin octaves.Some  
examples:  
Q
Bandwidth  
0.1 approximately 6 1/2 octaves  
0.4 approximately 3 octaves  
0.7 approximately 2 octaves  
1.4 approximately 1 octave  
2.9 approximately 1/2 octave  
4.3 approximately 1/3 octave  
5.8 approximately 1/4 octave  
7.2 approximately 1/5 octave  
8.7 approximately 1/6 octave  
10.0 approximately 1/7 octave  
MPX G2 Parametric EQ: Gain  
Q=1.0 Gain=+24dB, +18dB, +12dB,  
Fc=1000Hz  
+6dB, 0dB, -6dB, -18dB,  
-24dB, -36dB, -72dB  
Therearemathematicallimitsto how  
small the Q value can be in MPX G2  
EQeffects. Foranygiven frequency,  
the Q must be greater or equal to the  
frequency divided by 10,000. For  
example if the frequencyis5kHz, the  
actual Q value won’t go below 0.5.  
(The MPX G2 will allow you to dial in  
lower values, but the actual Qwill not  
go below the mathematical limit.)  
For most shelving applications, Q  
should be set very low (Around 0.2).  
As you increase the Q, the filter be-  
comes peaky, but a dip also devel-  
ops just outside the passband. For  
many applications, a bandpass or  
band cut filter with a moderate Qand  
a low (or high) center freq will prove  
sonically superior to the shelving fil-  
ter.  
MPX G2 Parametric EQ: Q  
Gain=±18dB Q=0.1, 0.3, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0,  
4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0  
Fc=1000Hz  
Making a Low Pass Filter  
To make a two-pole low-pass filter,  
startwith ahighshelf, andsetGain to  
-72 (effectively off). This creates a  
lowpassfilterwithacornerfrequency  
at Fc. A Q of 0.7 makes a flat pass-  
band. Higher Q settings produce a  
peak at Fc, and lower Q settings  
produce a droop.  
MPX G2 Parametric EQ: Shelf  
Gain=+10dB Q=0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0,  
4.0, 10.0  
Fc=1000Hz  
7-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
1-Band (M), 2-Band (M), 3-Band (M) and 4-Band (M)  
The 1-Band (M) effect provides  
a single band of double-precision  
parametric EQ.  
2-Band (M), 3-Band (M) and 4-  
Band (M) have two, three and four  
bands,respectively,ofdouble-pre-  
cision parametric EQ. Each effect  
has adjustable center frequency,  
Q, boost/cut and filter type (low  
shelf, band, high shelf).  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
-72 to +24dB  
20-20000Hz  
0.1-10.0  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Boost/cut gain of filter(s)  
Center or corner frequency of filter(s)  
Q of filter(s)  
Gain (1-4)  
Fc (1-4)  
Q (1-4)  
Mode (1-4)  
50  
190  
190  
190  
190  
LShlf, Band, HShlf  
Determines EQ type(s)  
1-Band (M)  
70  
2-Band (M)  
90  
3-Band (M)  
110  
4-Band (M)  
1-Band (S), and 2-Band (S)  
1-Band (S) has two bands of  
double-precision parametric EQ,  
one on each channel. 2-Band (S)  
has four bands of double-preci-  
sion parametric EQ, two on each  
channel.  
The two channels share the fil-  
ter controls. Center frequency, Q,  
boost/cut and filter type (low shelf,  
band, high shelf) are adjustable.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
-72 to +24dB  
20-20000Hz  
0.1-10.0  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Boost/cut gain of filter(s)  
Center or corner frequency of filter(s)  
Q of filter(s)  
Gain (1-2)  
Fc (1-2)  
Q (1-2)  
Mode (1-2)  
68  
190  
190  
LShlf, Band, HShlf  
Determines EQ type(s)  
1-Band (S)  
109  
2-Band (S)  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
1-Band (D) and 2-Band (D)  
1-Band (D) has two bands of  
double-precision parametric EQ,  
one on each channel. 2-Band (D)  
has four bands of double-preci-  
sion parametric EQ, two on each  
channel.  
Center frequency, Q, boost/cut  
and filter type (low shelf, band,  
high shelf) are adjustable.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
-72 to +24dB  
20-20000Hz  
0.1-10.0  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Boost/cut gain of left filter(s)  
Center or corner frequency of left filter(s)  
Q of left filter(s)  
G-L, G-L1, G-L2  
Fc-L, Fc-L1, Fc-L2  
Q-L, Q-L1, Q-L2  
M-L, M-L1, M-L2  
G-R, G-R1, G-R2  
68  
190  
190  
LShlf, Band, HShlf  
-72 to +24dB  
Determines EQ type(s)  
Boost/cut gain of right filter(s)  
Center or corner frequency of right filter(s)  
Q of right filter(s)  
1-Band (D)  
109  
Fc-R, Fc-R1, Fc-R2 20-20000Hz  
Q-R, Q-R1, Q-R2  
M-R, M-R1, M-R2  
0.1-10.0  
LShlf, Band, HShlf  
Determines EQ type(s)  
2-Band (D)  
Fc Splitter  
The Fc Splitter effect splits a  
mono input into a low-passed out-  
put on the left channel and a high-  
passed output on the right, with  
independent control of the corner  
frequencies of both filters. If the  
corner frequencies are the same,  
and the balance is set to 0, the  
frequency response will be flat  
whenthetwooutputsaresummed.  
Balcontrolsthe relativelevelofleft  
andrightoutputs.WhenBal=0,the  
left and right outputs are not at-  
tenuated. Negative values attenu-  
ate the right output (highs). Posi-  
tivevaluesattenuate theleft(lows).  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level*  
LoCut  
HiCut  
Bal*  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
100-10000Hz  
100-10000Hz  
-50 to +50  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Corner frequency for the low cut (highpass)band  
Corner frequency for the high cut (lowpass) band  
Relative level of the low and high band  
55  
190  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Crossover  
The Crossover effect is similar  
to Fc Splitter, but with only one  
crossover frequency, shared by  
low and high. In this effect, Level  
and Bal are not interpolated.  
Mix  
Level  
Fc  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
100-10000Hz  
-50 to +50  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Crossover frequency  
29  
190  
Bal  
Relative level of the low and high band  
Volume (M), Volume (S) and Volume (D)  
The Volume effects can be  
Volume (M)  
Volume (S)  
placed in front of, or behind, other  
effect blocks to provide smooth  
level control through a 95dB  
range. You can use them for dy-  
namic input or output control, EQ  
input trim (helpful when adding  
large amounts of gain with an EQ  
effect), stereo to mono mixer,  
crossfadecontrols,volumepedal,  
etc.  
Volume (D)  
In Volume(M) the left and right  
inputs are mixed together, then  
sent to both outputs through a vol-  
ume control.  
In Volume (S) the left and right  
inputs are sent through a ganged  
pair of volume controls.  
In Volume (D) the left and right  
inputs are sent through indepen-  
dent volume controls.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level*  
Vol*  
Off, -89 to +6dB  
0-100%  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
Amount of effect in the processed signal  
17  
190  
190  
190  
Voume (M)  
13  
Volume (S)  
18  
Voume (D)  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Effe c ts a nd Pa ra m e te rs  
PedalVol and ExtPedalVol  
PedalVol is the same as Vol-  
ume(S),excepttheVolparameter  
is hardwired to the Foot Pedal in-  
put on the MPX G2. When using  
the MPX R1 MIDI Remote Con-  
troller, this parameter is automati-  
cally connected to the R1’s built-in  
pedal. This means that no patch-  
ing is required to create a volume  
pedal effect.  
Mix  
0-100%  
Dry/Wet ratio  
Level*  
0ff, -89dB to +6dB  
Amount of effect in processsed signal  
ExtPedalVol is hardwired to the  
External Pedal input of the MPX  
R1, allowing you to easily create  
programs with both a Volume and  
Wah pedal available simulta-  
neously.  
13  
190  
PedalVol and ExtPedalVol  
* = Interpolated; ( ) = Option of preceding parameter  
7-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
7-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
This chapter describes all of the MPX G2 internal controllers. Examples of  
presets which make use of acontroller are noted to the sideof each description.  
The controls for making individual adjustments and assignments to the control-  
lers are available in the Edit menu and are described in Chapter 3: Editing.  
MPX G2 Internal  
Controllers  
Knob  
TheKnobcontrollerallows youtodefineyourowncustompatchcontroller.Once  
defined, you can place it in the Soft Row with its own label. You can even define  
the upper and lower limits of the control. Use Knob when you want to manually  
adjust thevalues ofmore thanoneparameter simultaneously, or whenyouwant  
to limit the range of control over a single parameter.  
Knob (Soft knob assignment for front panel parameter control)  
Parameter  
Value  
Range  
0-127  
Description  
initial setting  
Low  
0-127  
Low point of range  
High point of range  
Custom name  
High  
0-127  
Name  
9 characters  
In general an LFO is a source whose output cycles constantly between 0, 127 LFO1 and LFO2  
and 0. Each LFO produces four simultaneous output waveforms: Sine, Cosine,  
Triangle and Pulse. Rate controls how fast the output cycles — you can set the  
LFO Modes  
Off:  
On:  
LFO is disabled (OnSrc and  
OnLvl are ignored)  
rate as either a frequency (such as 3Hz) or as a rhythmic value (such as 2:3  
cycles per beat). A Depth parameter scalesthe output range. Several additional  
parameters make the MPX G2 LFOs very flexible. Mode, OnSrc and OnLvl  
allow youtoturn theLFOs onandoffin different ways basedontheoutput levels  
of other MPX G2 controllers. PW allows you to dynamically modify the shape  
of LFO waveforms. Phase lets you change the phase of the Cosine relative to  
the other waveforms (Sine, Triangle, and Pulse).  
LFO is always on (OnSrc  
and OnLvl are ignored)  
In the remaining modes, when the  
value of OnSrc rises above or falls  
below the value of OnLvl the LFO is  
switched on and off as follows:  
Latch: LFO toggles on and off  
whenever OnSrc value rises  
above OnLvl  
NOTE: In all modes, the LFO completes its current cycle before stopping.  
The first press of Tap resets the LFOs.  
Gate: LFO stays on while OnSrc  
value is greater than OnLvl  
Once: LFO sweeps through one  
complete cycle when OnSrc  
value rises above OnLvl.  
(During the sweep, further  
changes of OnSrc value are  
ignored.)  
LFO (1 or 2)  
Parameter  
Range  
Description  
Mode  
Off, On, Latch, Gate,  
Once, Reset, RTrig  
Controls behavior of Source  
when OnLvl is reached  
Rate  
0-50.00/1:24-24:1  
LFO speed  
Reset: LFO is always on, but its  
phase resets to 0° whenever  
OnSrc value rises above  
OnLvl.  
(Rate units)  
PW  
Option of Rate: Hz or Cycles per Beat  
Varies the pulse width of all shapes  
0-100%  
Phase  
-120° to +120°  
Relative phase difference between Sine and  
Cosine  
RTrig: LFO completes one cycle  
when OnSrc value rises  
above OnLvl. (The phase of  
the LFO can be reset to 0° if  
OnSrc value rises above  
OnLvl during the sweep.)  
Depth  
OnLvl  
0-100%  
0-127  
Controls the amplitude of all shapes  
Start/Stop level for Latch, Gate, Once, Reset  
and RTrig modes  
OnSrc  
Off, On, any internal  
or MIDI controller  
Determines which control source is used to  
turn LFO on and off in Latch, Gate, Once,  
Reset and RTrig modes.  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Random Generator  
This controller produces a random stream of numbers whose maximum range  
is 0-127. You can limit both the lowest and highest values and control the rate  
at which the numbers are generated.  
Random (Random Number Generator)  
Parameter  
RndLo  
Range  
0-127  
Description  
Low limit  
RndHi  
0-127  
High Limit  
Rate  
0-50.00  
Speed  
(Rate Units)  
Option of Rate: Hz or Cycles per Beat  
The A/B Glide controller is linked to the front panel A/B button and LEDs.  
Pressing the button toggles the state of the controller between A and B, as  
indicated by the LEDs.  
A/B Glide  
A/B Glide Modes  
Trig:  
Toggles between A and B  
whenever A/B button is  
pressed or OnSrc value  
rises above OnLvl.  
When the controller is at A, its output is 0. When it is at B, its output is 127.  
Controls are provided to allow you to determine the rate at which it glides from  
A to B and from B to A.  
Gate: Glide from A to B when  
OnSrc value rises above  
OnLvl. Glides from B to A  
whenever OnSrc value  
falls below OnLvl. The A/B  
button is ignored.  
Of the many presets in the MPX G2 that use this controller, the most straight-  
forward example is Program 47 Rotary Cab. In this preset, A/B is used to glide  
betweenthefastandslowratesofarotaryspeakereffect. DifferentAandBrates  
are used to simulate the mechanical inertia of the real thing. Note that you can  
use the OnSrc parameter to select other controllers to initiate the glide.  
Like the LFOs, A/B Glide has sev-  
eral simultaneous outputs that can  
be used as patch sources:  
A/B  
A/B:  
The A/B Glide controller is  
linked to the front panel  
A/B button and LEDs.  
Pressing the button  
toggles the state of the  
controller between A and  
B, as indicated by the  
LEDs.  
Parameter  
Mode  
Range  
Trig, Gate  
0-100  
Description  
See notes.  
ARate  
Time to go from A to B  
Time to go from B to A  
Threshold  
BRate  
0-100  
OnLvl  
0-127  
OnSrc  
Off, On, any internal  
or MIDI controller  
Selected trigger  
ATrg: This value changes from 0  
to 127 and back to 0 again  
whenever A/B changes  
from B to A.  
BTrg: This value changes from 0  
to 127 and back to 0 again  
whenever A/B changes  
from A to B.  
ABTrg : This value changes from 0  
to 127 and back to 0 again  
whenever A/B changes  
from A to B or B to A.  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Inte rna l Co ntro lle rs  
Env is an envelope follower which creates an output that varies with the level of  
the Src parameter. You can choose any two audio level as sources. To follow  
the levels on both Returns, set Src1 to Ret L and Src 2 to Ret R. Use Resp and  
ATrim to customize the response to level changes. Resp values below 50 take  
many seconds to “catch up” with audiolevel changes. For most situations, you’ll  
find values above 50 to be the most useful.  
Env  
Env  
Parameter  
Range  
Description  
Src (1 or 2)  
Off, In, Ret L, Ret R,  
FX1L, FX1R, FX2L,  
FX2R, ChrsL, ChrsR,  
EQL, EQR, RvbL,  
RvbR, DlyL, DlyR,  
PreOut, MainL, MainR  
Atrim  
Resp  
0-100  
0-100  
Allows attack time to be shortened relative  
to overall response. 0=same as Resp,  
larger numbers shorten response.  
Responsiveness  
The rear panel Foot Switch jack can be connected to as many as three  
independent analog switches. Each switch appears as two simultaneous patch  
sources.  
Footswitch Controllers  
Tog1: Value toggles between 0 and 127 at each off/on  
transition of foot switch 1.  
Tog2: Value toggles between 0 and 127 at each off/on  
transition of foot switch 2.  
Tog3: Value toggles between 0 and 127 at each off/on  
transition of foot switch 3.  
Sw1: Value is 0 when foot switch 1 is off, 127 when foot  
switch 1 is on.  
Sw2: Value is 0 when foot switch 2 is off, 127 when foot  
switch 2 is on.  
Sw3: Value is 0 when foot switch 3 is off, 127 when foot  
switch 3 is on.  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
9
Program  
Descriptions  
The 250 MPX G2 programs are organized into three major groups:  
1-99: Amp Input + FX Loop programs designed to be used with the MPX G2  
connected to a guitar amp with an effects loop  
100-149: Amp Input Only programs designed to be used with the MPX G2  
Most of the MPX G2 programs are  
already set up to take advantage of  
a connected MPX R1 MIDI Remote  
Controller. You’ll find references  
throughout to special controls as-  
signed to the MPX R1 pedal and its  
Toe Switch. Other pedals can be  
used but you will not be able to take  
advantage of the effects switching  
made possible with the MPXR1Toe  
Switch.  
connected to an amp with no effects loop  
150-248: Stand Alone programs designed to be used with the MPX G2  
connected directly to a mixer or power amp  
Each group is broken down into smaller sections which we’ve titled to make it  
easier for you to find just what you’re looking for.  
Programs 1-99 are designed to be used with the MPX G2  
connected to a guitar amp with an effects loop.  
Set both Input and  
Output to 2 o'clock.  
(See Quick Start.)  
ect Returns  
use to plug in  
your guitar)  
ht Main Out-  
t to guitar amp ith mono effects  
loop. (See instructions for setting MPX G2  
Audio Output Mode to Mono.)  
from guitar amp  
effects loop Send  
Adjust Level so that the  
Clip LED does not light.  
(See Quick Start.)  
These programs are designed to work in the high-gain channel of your guitar amp, set for  
moderate gain. The Screamer and Wah effects are programmed to have high output  
levels to increase sustain when they’re pumped into an amp that’s already being pushed  
prettyhard.Ifyouwanttousethisrigwithacleanampchannel,youmaywanttodecrease  
the Gain (Screamer) and Effect 2 (Wah) levels a bit.  
Top Nineteen  
(Amp Input + FX Loop)  
1
G2 Blue  
This is one heck of a rig — our take on the Cry Baby wah, Uni Vibe and Tube Screamer  
— all tweaked up to drive a guitar amp running with lots of gain. Use the MPX R1 Toe  
Switch to swap the Wah with the UniVybe. While the UniVybe is active, the pedal is a  
powerampvolumecontrol.TheScreameroverdriveisbypassedwhentheprogramloads  
— press Gain to turn it on. A/B turns up the echo level and feedback. (A is dry, B is wet).  
Tap sets the echo rhythm.  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
2
Guitar Solo  
Analog Screamer with detuning delay and classic plate reverb. The MPX R1 pedal  
controlsvolumesoyoucanswellyourchordsintothereverb.A/Bcontrolsdelaydamping.  
Tap sets the echo time.The Toe Switch turns the pedal On and Off.  
3
Cordovox  
This program simulates the sound of a Cordovox cabinet — a single speaker with a  
rotating baffle that produces a swirling stereo vibe. The Gain effect is clean analog Tone  
that will boost your amp a bit so when you dig in you get some grit but, as you play lighter,  
or switch to less powerful pickups, you get cleaner sounds. A/B controls fast and slow  
speeds of the rotating baffle. Tap sets the echo time.The MPX R1 pedal controls volume,  
the Toe Switch turns the pedal On and Off.  
4
Power Chords  
A2-voicepitchshifterwithonevoicesetforanoctavedown.A/Btogglesthesecondvoice  
between a fourth down and unison. Press Gain for high-gain distortion. Tap sets the  
delay time. The MPX R1 pedal controls the pitch shift mix, its Toe Switch turns pitch On  
and Off.  
5
Vybe/Flange  
Here’s a rig that lets you jump between vintage and modern sounds by using the MPX  
R1 Toe Switch to swap the UniVybe with a Stereo Flanger. The UniVybe is in front of the  
amp and the Flanger is in the effects loop. The pedal is a power amp volume pedal. A/  
B pumps up the echo level and repeats when set to B. The Screamer analog overdrive  
loads bypassed — press Gain to light things up.  
6
AnotherBrick  
This echo/chorus program was inspired by Pink Floyd. “Hey! Leave those kids alone!”  
Press A/B to split delay times in half. Tap sets delay times. The MPX R1 pedal controls  
volume, so you can swell your chords into the reverb. The Toe Switch turns the pedal on  
and off.  
7
EnvFilter LP  
A very funky, synth-like effect, reminiscent of a Mu-tron III set to “LP”. The dynamics of  
your playing opens and closes a resonant filter. A/B brings in some stereo echoes. The  
MPX R1 pedal controls the effects sensitivity to your playing dynamics. The Toe Switch  
turns the effect on and off.  
8
TremoWah  
An LFO/tempo-controlled wah before guitar amp input followed by an LFO/tempo-  
controlled tremolo which flows into a tempo-controlled delay and then a stereo panner.  
Listen to the results! A/B changes the mix value of the wah and tremolo. The MPX R1  
pedal controls volume, the Toe Switch turns the pedal on and off.  
9
JamMan  
It’s baaaack!!!!!!! A medium-gain preamp with a chorus, reverb and a 20-second single  
loop JamMan! The MPX G2 front panel buttons or the MPX R1 control:  
Tap = Record Loop  
A/B = Layer  
Delay = Clear Loop  
TheMPXR1ToeSwitchletsthepedalcontrolvolume(ToeSwitchoff)orwah(ToeSwitch  
on).  
10 VH Rig  
A classic VHstomp rig. This programs loads with OrangePhase and delay for the original  
sound. Press Chorus, Effect 1 and Reverb to add a classic gray flange and a Dual  
Detuner for the new Eddie Sound. A/B adds delay and delay feedback. Tap sets delay  
times. The MPX R1 pedal controls volume, the Toe Switch turns the pedal on and off.  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Pro g ra m De sc rip tio ns  
11 Rotary Cab  
ALesliewithabitofchambertofattenupthesound.PressGaintoaddalittlegrit,sowhen  
you dig in you get some distortion. A/B controls fast and slow speeds of the rotary  
speaker. The MPX R1 Toe Switch activates pedal control of volume or wah.  
12 Little Wing  
A vintage plate reverb with our classic Univybe. Press Gain for fuzz. A/B changes the  
reverb mix level. The MPX R1 pedal controls the wah. The Toe Switch turns the wah on  
and off.  
13 TechnoChords  
Playachordandletit ringout.Randomtones ringoutintodelay andreverb.A/Bchanges  
the mix of the effect so that more of the original signal can be heard. Tap changes delay  
time and LFOspeeds controlling a sweep filter. The MPX R1 Toe Switch gives you pedal  
control of volume or of volume with a sweep filter scale.  
14 Pedal Swell  
Compression with chorus and delay that go into a panner. A truly stereo effect. A/B  
changes delay feedback time from 20 to 80%. Tap sets delay time. The MPX R1 pedal  
controls volume to let you create ethereal volume swells. The Toe Switch turns the pedal  
on and off.  
15 Slide Comp  
Agrittypreampandtwocompressorsinseries.Thistrick allowsslideplayerstousealight  
touch and still get singing sustain.  
16 Kiss the Sky  
Hendrix-style fuzz with an Octabuzz. A/B turns off the Octabuzz and switches between  
two different echo times. Tap sets echo time. The MPX R1 pedal controls the wah. The  
Toe Switch turns the wah on and off.  
17 Unchained  
The classic Gray Flange with the mix toned down a bit, and some delay. Press A/B to  
toggletheflangeon andoff likethe realriff. Tapsets delay time.This programworks best  
into a high-gain amp. The MPX R1 pedal controls volume, the Toe Switch turns the pedal  
on and off.  
18 Stomp!  
A collection of classic stomp boxes just waiting to be activated. Press Gain for a  
Screamer, Effect 1 for a Univybe, Effect 2 for a Wah, Chorus for a Flanger, Delay for  
Echo and Reverb for a vintage plate. A/B increases the delay and reverb mix. Tap  
changes delay time. The MPX R1 Toe Switch activates pedal control of volume or wah.  
19 OctaWah  
This rig lets you switch from a standard vintage echo and plate reverb to a full-on  
Screamer with Octabuzz and Wah. The MPX R1 Toe Switch simultaneously adds gain,  
EQ,Wahand Octabuzzfora classic Hendrix sound. Whenthe pedalisnot controllingthe  
wah, its acts as a power amp volume pedal. A/B adds more delay and reverb. Tap sets  
the echo time.  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Programs 20-29 are organized to work as a custom effects rig when used with the MPX  
R1MIDIRemoteController.Alloftheprogramsfeaturevintagewahandanalogoverdrive  
in combination with a volume pedal and a modulation effect (UniVybe, OrangePhase,  
Flanger, Chorus). Tap echo and plate reverbs are also built-in.  
Vintage Rig  
(Amp Input + FX Loop)  
In all of the programs, the pedal  
becomes a power amp volume  
pedal when the wah is bypassed.  
MPX G2 programs 20 and 26-29 cor-  
respond to MPX R1 buttons 6-0. In  
theseprograms,theToeSwitchturns  
the wah on and off.  
Tap sets the echo  
rhythm.  
Programs 21-25 correspond to  
MPX R1 buttons 1-5. In these pro-  
grams, the Toe Switch swaps the  
wah with the modulation effect.  
A/B alternatesbetween “in your face”  
(straight ahead, dry tone), and “the  
big moment” (increased echo/reverb  
effects and wider stereo spread).  
These programs are designed to work in the high-gain channel of your guitar amp, set for  
moderate gain. The Screamer and Wah effects are programmed to have high output  
levels to increase sustain when they’re pumped into an amp that’s already being pushed  
prettyhard.Ifyouwanttousethis rigwith acleanampchannel,youmaywanttodecrease  
the Gain (Screamer) and Effect 2 (Wah) levels a bit.  
21 ToeWah/Flng  
Alternate between amp input wah and effects loop stereo flanger by pressing the MPX  
R1 Toe Switch.  
22 ToeWah/Phas  
This variation swaps the wah with OrangePhase. Both effects are in front of your amp.  
23 ToeWah/Chorus  
Choruseffects sounddifferent whentheygoinfrontofanoverdrivenamp.PresstheMPX  
R1 Toe Switch to hear for yourself.  
24 ToeWah/Aero  
Swap between the amp input wah and a stereo flange in the effects loop.  
25 ToeWah/Uni  
While it’s almost impossible to play through these effects and not think of Hendrix, the  
vintage power trio of Wah, Screamer and UniVybe has become the tonal foundation of  
many other players. These effects are all in front of your amp — where they belong. Echo  
and Plate are in the effects loop.  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Pro g ra m De sc rip tio ns  
Programs 20 and 26-29 are variations of 21-25. Each offers the same combination of  
Wah, Screamer and modulation effects with the MPX R1 Toe Switch turning the wah on  
and off. This makes it possible to have the wah and modulation effects on at the same  
time.  
20 Wah & Uni  
26 Wah & Flange  
27 Wah & Phaser  
28 Wah & Chorus  
29 Wah & Aero  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Programs 30-39 are based on combinations of Screamer, Compressor, Wah, Volume  
Pedal, Chorus, Delay and Hall Reverb. In all of these programs, the MPX R1 Toe Switch  
activates pedal control of volume or wah. Tap set delay time andA/B increases the delay  
feedback time.  
Chorus Delay Rig  
(Amp Input + FX Loop)  
The pedal controls  
volume or wah.  
The Toe Switch  
MPX G2 programs 30 and 36-39  
correspond to MPX R1 buttons 6-0.  
turns the pedal on  
and off.  
Tap sets the delay  
rhythm.  
Programs 31-35 correspond  
to MPX R1 buttons 1-5.  
A/B increases the delay  
and feedback time.  
30 ChrsDlyRvb+  
Screamer for a bit of boost with compression, chorus, delay and reverb.  
31 TS Chorus+  
Screamer and Chorus. Press Effect 1 to add a compressor, Chorus, Delay or Reverb  
for additional effects.  
32 TS Delay+  
Screamer and Delay. Press Effect 1 to add a compressor, Chorus, or Reverb for  
additional effects.  
33 TS ChrsDly+  
Screamer with Chorus and Delay. Press Effect 1 to add a compressor, or Reverb for  
additional effects.  
34 TS Reverb+  
Screamer and Reverb. Press Effect 1 to add a compressor, Chorus, or Reverb for  
additional effects.  
35 TSChrsRvb+  
Screamer with Chorus and Reverb. Press Effect 1 to add a compressor, or Delay for  
additional effects.  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Pro g ra m De sc rip tio ns  
36 CompChorus+  
A cleaner version of TS Chorus+ with BlueComp in place of the Screamer for cleaner  
tone.  
37 CompDelay+  
A cleaner variation TS Delay+ with BlueComp in place of the Screamer for cleaner tone.  
38 CmpChsDly+  
Cleaner version of TS ChorsDly+ with BlueComp in place of the Screamer for cleaner  
tone.  
39 CmpChsRvb+  
A cleaner version of TS ChrsRvb+ with BlueComp in place of the Screamer for cleaner  
tone.  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Programs 40-49 are ogranized as a custom effects rig when used with the MPX R1 MIDI  
Remote Controller.  
Pitch Rig  
(Amp Input + FX Loop)  
All fo the programs feature pitch bending or harmony. Analog overdrive, stereo delay,  
chorus/detune and reverb are included as well, but most of the programs load with them  
bypassed. They’re ready to go, if you want to add them to the mix.  
In programs 41-45, the pedal glides the  
pitch. In programs 40 and 46-49, it bcomes  
a volume control for harmony notes.  
MPX G2 programs 40 and 46-49  
correspond to MPX R1 buttons 6-0.  
These are harmony effects.  
The Toe Switch  
turns the pitch  
shifter on and off.  
Tap sets the delay  
rhythm.  
Programs 41-45 correspond  
to MPX R1 buttons 1-5. These  
are pitch bending effects.  
A/B changes the bend  
or harmony interval.  
Programs 41-45 are set up as pitch pedals for dive bomb and bend effects. In each of  
these, the pitch shifter is in front of the amp.  
41 Pdl Octaves  
Use the pedal to create outrageous octave sweeps. A/B changes the direction of the  
sweep (A=octave up, B=octave down). Chorus, delay and reverb are in the effects loop.  
Check out the Glide parameter in the Soft Row. When it’s Off, the pedal prodcues a  
chromatic glissando instead of a continuous glide.  
42 Pdl 2nds  
The pedal gives you whole-step bends. A=bend up. B=bend down.  
43 Pdl 2->3 b3->3  
Theshiftedsignalismixedwith thedry signalto produce 2-voice harmony. Thepedal lets  
you bend the shifted harmony voice. UseA/B to alternate thebasic tuning. A=whole-step  
bend from major second to major third. B=half-step bend from minor third to major third.  
44 Pdl 2->3 3->4  
Use A/B to alternate the basic tuning. A=whole-step bend from major second to major  
third. B=whole-step bend from major third to a fourth.  
45 Pdl 4->5 5->6  
UseA/Btoalternatethebasictuning.A=whole-stepbendfromafourthtoafifth.B=whole-  
step bend from fifth to a sixth.  
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Pro g ra m De sc rip tio ns  
Programs 40 and46-49 use the pitch shifter to produce harmony effects. All of the effects  
except Overdrive are in the effects loop. (Because the pitch effects are first, you can use  
the pedal to “float” notes into thedelay and reverb.)A/B alternates between two harmony  
settings. Tap sets the delay rhythm.  
40 PitchCascade  
This special effect is created by putting a dual pitch shifter in the feedback loop of a dual  
delay. Tap sets the delay rhythm. After going through the delay, the notes are pitch  
shifted. (A/B selects between up a fifth/down an octave and down a fourth/up an octave.)  
Then the pitch-shifted notes are recirculated through the delay and pitch-shifted again.  
The recirculation is controlled by the XFbk1 and XFbk2 parameters. (They’re in the Soft  
Row along with delay time and other goodies.)  
46 Octaves  
Use the pedal to fade two additional harmony voices in and out. A/B alternates between  
tunings. A=one octave up (doubled). B=one octave down and two octaves down.  
47 4ths & 5ths  
Play power chords from single notes — with your note on the top or bottom of the chord.  
A/Balternatesbetweentunings.A=upafithandupanoctave.B=downafourthanddown  
an octave.  
48 E Maj/Min 3  
Tune up and play melodies in the Key of E. The DiatonicHmy effect automatically  
harmonizes your notes in thirds. Use A/B to alternate between E Major and E Minor  
(Aeolian). You can change to any other key by adjusting the value of the Key parameter  
— you’ll find it in the Soft Row.  
49 E Dor/Mix 3  
InthisprogramtheDiatonicHmyeffectis settoproduce3rdsinEDorian(sameasEmajor  
with b3 and b7 ) or E Mixolydian (same as E major with b7). Change keys with the Key  
parameter in the Soft Row.  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Programs 50-59 are ogranized as a custom effects rig when used with the MPX R1 MIDI  
Remote Controller. All of the programs feature tremolo, auto pan and auto wah filter  
effects. In programs in which the pedal controls rate, Tap sets the delay rhythm. In  
programs that have depth controlled by the pedal,Tap sets the rate of the effect. A/B is  
patched so that B is wetter (more reverb or delay) than A.  
Tremolo and  
Filter Effects  
(Amp Input + FX Loop)  
These programs will work well with your guitar amp’s clean or high-gain channels.  
The Toe Switch  
The pedal controls rate  
turns the featured  
or depth of the effect.  
MPX G2 programs 50 and  
56-59 correspond to MPXR1  
buttons 6-0.  
effect (tremolo, auto  
pan or auto wah) on  
and off.  
Tap sets delay  
rhythm or the rate of  
the effect.  
Programs 51-55 correspond  
to MPX R1 buttons 1-5.  
A/B switches between the effect (A) and a  
wetter (more reverb or delay) version (B).  
50 Detune Trem  
This one delivers the big throb with a tempo-controlled tremolo in front of your amp, dual  
pitch shift, delay and reverb in the effects loop. Tremolo depth is pedal-controlled.  
51 Square Trem  
A square wave LFO gives this tremolo a hard edge before it hits your amp. (Be sure to  
checkoutthePWparameterintheSoftRow.)Tapthetempoandsetdepthwiththepedal.  
52 Trem>AutoWah  
This stereo program combines an auto panner and dual auto wahs to create an unusual,  
but totally musical result. The rates of all three effects are synchronized with Tap. The  
pedal controls the depths of the wahs.  
53 Env Trem  
RedComp pumps up the signal before it gets to your amp. From there, it runs through  
reverb auto pan, chorus and delay. The twist here is that the panner rate is envelope-  
controlled.Play abigchordandlistentoit ringout.Thepedal controls panningdepth.Tap  
sets the delay rhythm.  
54 Env AutoWahs  
Analternativetakeonstandardtremoloeffects.Dual autowahsinyouramp’seffectsloop  
are controlled by your playing dynamics. The pedal controls the depth of both wahs.  
9-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Pro g ra m De sc rip tio ns  
55 Chaos Dance  
This techno rhythm effect is produced by hitting the amp input with a randomized  
envelope filter and adding some delay and reverb in the effects loop. The pedal controls  
thefilter’soverallbrightness.Tapsetsthepatternrate.Makethepatterndancewith Rand  
Rate and LFO2 Rate in the Soft Row.  
56 Round Trem  
A classic combination of vintage and modern effects. In front of the amp there’s a tempo-  
controlled tremolo with a vintage vibe. Delay and reverb are in the effects loop. If you  
want even more shimmer, turn on Effect 1. (It’s running a dual pitch shifter, tweaked for  
fat detune). The pedal controls the depth of the tremolo.  
57 Tap AutoWah  
Give your foot a rest. Tapin the tempo and letthe stereo auto wah do the work. The pedal  
controls the overall depth of both wahs.  
58 Verbolo  
Some vintage amps placed the tremolo circuit after the reverb tank so you could crank  
up the reverb without washing out the tremolo. Guess what? This program lets your amp  
do the same thing — and there’s a little dual pitch shift in there to make your sound way  
huge. Tremolo rate is controlled by the pedal.  
59 DynaChrsTrem  
Another combination of old and new. First, there’s a RedComp compressor in front of the  
preamp for stomp box style sustain. Then we’ve added a reverb followed by tremolo plus  
stereochorusanddelay intheeffectsloop.Usethepedaltofindjusttherighttremolorate.  
9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Programs 60-79 each contain a single effect. Use them alone, or as building blocks to  
create your own multi-effects programs from scratch. Use Copy Effect in Edit mode to  
copy different combinations into a single program.  
Effects Collection  
(Amp Input + FX Loop)  
60 Univybe  
Our recreation of a vintage Uni Vibe, a signature Hendrix sound.  
61 Octave Fuzz  
This program combines a sub octave with Octavia-style effects with analog distortion.  
The sub octave comes in when A/B is toggled to B. Turn Gain on and off to control the  
fuzzdistortion. Effect2istheOctaBuzz.TogetthatHendrixsound,turnoffthesuboctave  
andplaysinglenotesabovethe12thfretusingyourneck pickup.TheMPXR1ToeSwitch  
simultaneously turns the shifter, Octabuzz and distortion on and off. Thepedal is a power  
amp booster that provides an additional 6dB of volume to kick a solo out over the edge.  
62 Phaser  
A recreation of the classic Mu-tron Phaser  
63 EnvFilter  
A recreation of the Mu-tron autowah. Look out Bootsy!  
64 C-Wah:  
Our recreation of the classic Crybaby Wah. The MPX R1 pedal controls the wah sweep  
while the MPX R1 Toe Switch turns the wah on and off like the original.  
65 Blue Comp  
A recreation of the Boss CS-2 Compressor — a staple of many country players.  
66 Vintage Trem  
A classic vintage tremolo.  
67 IPS TapeSlap  
Press A/B to select delays that simulate 7.5 or 15ips tape slaps.  
68 Space Echo  
A simple but tasty delay effect. The sound changes with each repeat. For the sound of  
the more expensive version, press Chorus, which is bypassed when the program loads.  
69 Octabuzz  
Another classic Octavia effect — best known from Purple Haze.  
70 OrangePhase  
A recreation of the Phase 90 effect made famous by Eddie Van Halen.  
71 Gray Flange  
The flanger that created the signature sound on Van Halen’s “Unchained”.  
72 RedComp  
A recreation of the popular Dyna Comp compressor.  
73 S/H Pedal  
A recreation of the Maestro pedal used by Frank Zappa in the 70’s.  
74 V-Wah  
Our recreation of the classic Vox Wah. The MPX R1 pedal controls the wah sweep. The  
Toe Switch turns the wah on and off like the original.  
75 Modern Trem  
A modern (alternative style) tremolo with a sharper, square wave type feel than a vintage  
tremolo.  
9-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Pro g ra m De sc rip tio ns  
76 Tap Echo  
Tap sets the echo rhythm. A/B turns the input to the echo on and off (so that the repeats  
ring out when you turn it off). The MPX R1 pedal sets the loudness of the echoes. Press  
Soft Row for instant access to all of the delay parameters.The program loads with delay  
time set to 2 echoes/beat (8th note). Be sure to experiment with different values.  
77 Env Wah  
The sweep of this wah is dynamically controlled by your playing. Similar to the sound of  
a Mu-tron III set to BP.  
78 StereoChorus  
A lush Lexicon stereo chorus.  
79 ClassicDetune  
A simple but gorgeous effect. The dual pitch shifter is used to independently detune the  
left and right sides of the stereo field. The classic settings are ±8 cents, but feel free to  
modify these default settings.  
Analog Gain  
(Amp Input + FX Loop)  
Programs 80-89 are examples of dry sounds from the analog gain section. These are  
designed to be used as stomp boxes before your amp. There are no effects in these  
programs.  
80 Tone Boost  
A set of analog tone controls that can be used as a clean boost in front of your amp or as  
a variation of clean analog EQ. Great in front of your amp for tone shaping or as a clean  
analog gain boost to give your amp a kick.  
81 Crunch Boost  
Overdrive with separate drive controls for low, mid and high frequencies. Gives kick to  
basic blues sounds.  
82 TS Lead  
Our recreation of the classic TS-9. Great for virtually any application — blues, jazz, rock,  
metal etc.  
83 TS Boost  
A variation of TS Lead with less overall distortion and more level boost.  
84 OD Lead  
A more aggressive effect than Screamer but it still produces the classic overdrive.  
85 OD Boost  
A variation of OD Lead with less overall distortion and more level boost.  
86 Dist Lead  
Need more than Overdrive? Distortion provides more than 100dB of analog gain.  
87 Dist Boost  
A variation of Dist Lead with less overall distortion and more level boost.  
88 Fuzz 1  
Analog fuzz.  
89 Fuzz 2  
A more aggressive variation of Fuzz 1  
9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
JamMan Programs90-94aresetuptohavetheMPXG2frontpanelbuttonsortheMPXR1control:  
(Amp Input + FX Loop)  
Tap = Record Loop  
A/B = Layer  
Delay = Clear Loop  
90 Jam1 Chrs+  
Loads with Chorus and Hall Reverb. Press Gain for boost. The MPX R1 Toe Switch  
activates pedal control of volume or wah.  
91 Jam1 Uni+  
LoadswithUnivybeand PlateReverb.PressGainforoverdrive.TheMPXR1ToeSwitch  
turns the pedal on or off.  
92 Jam 1 S&H+  
Loads with a Sample & Hold style effect into a large hall Reverb. The MPXR1 Toe Switch  
activates pedal control of volume.  
93 Jam1 Env+  
Loads with an envelope filter and a plate reverb. Press Gain for overdrive, and Effect 1  
for tremolo. The MPX R1 Toe Switch activates pedal control of volume.  
94 Jam1Cordovox  
A Cordovox effect with reverb. The MPX R1 Toe Switch turns the Cordovox effect on and  
off, the pedal controls the Cordovox speed.  
Programs95-99aresetuptohavetheMPXG2frontpanelbuttonsortheMPXR1control:  
Tap = Record Loop  
A/B = Replace  
Delay = Start/Stop Loop  
95 Jam 2 Flange  
Loads with Jet Flange and Hall Reverb. Press Gain for distortion. The MPX R1 Toe  
Switch activates pedal control of volume or wah.  
96 Jam 2 Phase  
Loads with OrangePhase and Plate Reverb. Press Gain for Distortion. The MPX R1 Toe  
Switch activates pedal control of volume or wah.  
97 Jam 2 Pitch+  
Loads with Distortion, Pitch and Ambience. The MPX R1 Toe Switch swaps pedal  
controls between volume (Toe Switch off) and pitch (Toe Switch on).  
98 Jam 2 Trem  
Loads with an envelope filter and Plate Reverb. Press Gain for overdrive, and Effect 1  
for tremolo. The MPX R1 Toe Switch activates pedal control of volume or wah.  
99 Jam2AutoWah  
Auto wah with analog tone and Chamber Reverb. The MPX R1 Toe Switch activates  
pedal control of volume or wah.  
9-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Pro g ra m De sc rip tio ns  
Programs 100-149 are designed to be used with the MPX G2  
connected to a guitar amp with no effects loop.  
Front Panel  
Rear Panel  
Turn Input to 2 o'clock.  
The Output control is unnecessary  
when the MPX G2 is used with an amp  
that doesn't have an effects loop.  
to the guitar amp Input  
(the same input you would  
use to plug in your guitar)  
100 Vintage Rig  
Top Ten  
(Amp Input Only)  
A collection of classic stomp boxes just waiting to be activated. Press Gain for a  
Screamer,Effect1foraUniVybe, Effect2foraWahandChorusforaFlanger.TheMPX  
R1 Toe Switch activates pedal control of volume or wah.  
101 Pdl Octaves  
Use a pedal to create outrageous octave sweeps. A/B changes the direction of the  
sweep. A=octave up, B=octave down. Check out the Glide parameter in the Soft Row.  
When it’s set to Off, the pedal produces a chromatic glissando instead of a continuous  
glide.  
102 TechnoChords  
Playachordand letit ringout. Randomtones ringout intodelayandreverb.A/Bchanges  
the mix of the effect so that more of the original signal can be heard. The MPX R1 Toe  
Switch gives you pedal control of volume or of volume with a sweep filter scale.  
103 Cordovox  
This program simulates the sound of a Cordovox cabinet — a single speaker with a  
rotating baffle that produces a swirling stereo vibe. The Gain effect is clean analog Tone  
that will boost your amp a bit so when you dig in you get some grit but, as you play lighter,  
or switch to less powerful pickups, you get cleaner sounds. A/B controls fast and slow  
speeds of the rotating baffle. The MPX R1 pedal controls volume, the Toe Switch turns  
the pedal On and Off.  
104 Analog Echo  
This program produces sounds with many of the characteristics of vintage analog echo  
effectsincludingthetendencytorunawayifyoupushthe feedbacktoo hard.Ifyou’ve  
ever played around with an old tape echo, you’ll recognize this sound. This key to this  
effect is putting the analog Gain block inside the delay feedback loop. The signal is  
recirculated throughtheanalogsectioneverytimethe delay repeats.Theresultis aliteral  
analog echo. A chorus is inserted in the feedback loop as well.  
105 Wah & Uni  
A great rig with Wah, UniVybe and Screamer tweaked to drive a guitar amp running with  
lots of gain. Use the MPX R1 Toe Switch to swap the Wah with the UniVybe. While the  
UniVybe is active, the pedal is an amp input volume control. The Screamer overdrive is  
bypassed when the program loads — press Gain to give your amp a kick. Tap sets the  
echo rhythm.  
9-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
106 EnvFilter LP  
A very funky, synth-like effect, reminiscent of a Mu-tron III set to “LP”. The dynamics of  
your playing opens and closes a resonant filter. Change the Scale parameter in the Soft  
Row to adjust to the output differences of different guitars and basses.  
107 InfiniteEcho  
A variation of Analog Echo that adds the BlueComp compressor and Detune(M) to the  
analog feedback path. The compressor limits the feedback signal so that the effect never  
runs away. You can increase the number of repeats by turning up the front panel tone  
controls as well as altering the Delay Fbk parameter in the Soft Row.  
108 FuzzWah+  
Loads with a compressor on and a fuzz wah just waiting to be activated by the MPX R1  
Toe Switch. The MPX R1 pedal controls the wah; the Toe Switch simultaneously turns  
gain and wah on or off. A/B adds chorus and echo.  
109 JamMan  
It’s baaaack!!!!!!! A medium-gain preamp with a chorus, reverb and a 20-second single  
loop JamMan! The MPX G2 front panel buttons or the MPX R1 control:  
Tap = Record Loop  
A/B = Layer  
Delay = Clear Loop  
TheMPXR1ToeSwitchletsthepedalcontrolvolume(ToeSwitchoff)orwah(ToeSwitch  
on).  
Analog Gain  
(Amp Input Only)  
Programs 110-119 are examples of dry sounds from the analog gain section. These are  
designed to be used as stomp boxes before your amp. There are no effects in these  
programs.  
110 Tone Boost  
A set of analog tone controls that can be used as a clean boost in front of your amp or as  
a variation of clean analog EQ. Great in front of your amp for tone shaping or as a clean  
analog gain boost to give your amp a kick.  
111 Crunch Boost  
Overdrive with separate drive controls for low, mid and high frequencies. Gives kick to  
basic blues sounds.  
112 TS Lead  
Our recreation of the classic TS-9. Great for virtually any application — blues, rock jazz,  
metal etc.  
113 TS Boost  
A variation of TS Lead with less overall distortion and more level boost.  
114 OD Lead  
A more aggressive effect than Screamer but it still produces the classic overdrive.  
115 OD Boost  
A variation of OD Lead with less overall distortion and more level boost.  
116 Dist Lead  
Need more than Overdrive? Distortion provides more than 100dB of analog gain.  
117 Dist Boost  
A variation of Dist Lead with less overall distortion and more level boost.  
9-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Pro g ra m De sc rip tio ns  
118 Fuzz 1  
Analog fuzz.  
119 Fuzz 2  
A more aggressive variation of Fuzz 1.  
Programs 120-139 each contain a single effect. Use them alone, or as building blocks to  
create your own multi-effects programs from scratch. Use Copy Effect in Edit mode to  
copy different combinations into a single program.  
Effects Collection  
(Amp Input Only)  
120 Univybe  
Our recreation of a vintage Uni Vibe, a signature Hendrix sound.  
121 Octave Fuzz  
This program combines a sub octave with Octavia-style effects with analog distortion.  
The sub octave comes in when A/B is toggled to B. Turn Gain on and off to control the  
fuzzdistortion. Effect2istheOctaBuzz.TogetthatHendrixsound,turnoffthesuboctave  
andplaysinglenotesabovethe12thfretusingyourneck pickup.TheMPXR1ToeSwitch  
simultaneously turns the shifter, Octabuzz and distortion on and off. Thepedal is a power  
amp booster that provides an additional 6dB of volume to kick a solo out over the edge.  
122 Phaser  
A recreation of the classic Mu-tron Phaser  
123 EnvFilter  
A recreation of the Mu-tron autowah. Look out Bootsy!  
124 C-Wah:  
Our recreation of the classic Crybaby Wah. The MPX R1 pedal controls the wah sweep  
while the MPX R1 Toe Switch turns the wah on and off like the original.  
125 Blue Comp  
A recreation of the Boss CS-2 Compressor — a staple of many country players.  
126 Vintage Trem  
A classic vintage tremolo.  
127 IPS TapeSlap  
Press A/B to select delays that simulate 7.5 or 15ips tape slaps. Modified to be used  
before your amp’s input.  
128 Space Echo  
A simple but tasty delay effect. The sound changes with each repeat. For the sound of  
the more expensive version, press Chorus, which is bypassed when the program loads.  
129 Octabuzz  
Another classic Octavia effect — best known from Purple Haze.  
130 OrangePhase  
A recreation of the Phase 90 effect made famous by Eddie Van Halen.  
131 Gray Flange  
The flanger that created the signature sound on Van Halen’s “Unchained”.  
132 RedComp  
A recreation of the popular Dyna Comp compressor.  
9-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
133 S/H Pedal  
A recreation of the Maestro pedal used by Frank Zappa in the 70's.  
134 V-Wah  
Our recreation of the classic Vox Wah. The MPX R1 pedal controls the wah sweep. The  
Toe Switch turns the wah on and off like the original.  
135 Modern Trem  
A modern (alternative style) tremolo with a sharper, square wave type feel than a vintage  
tremolo.  
136 Tap Echo  
Tap sets the echo rhythm. A/B turns the input to the echo on and off (so that the repeats  
ring out when you turn it off). The MPX R1 pedal sets the loudness of the echoes. Press  
Soft Row for instant access to all of the delay parameters.The program loads with delay  
time set to 2 echoes/beat (8th note). Be sure to experiment with different values.  
137 Env Wah  
The sweep of this wah is dynamically controlled by your playing. Similar to the sound of  
a Mu-tron III set to BP.  
138 StereoChorus  
A lush Lexicon stereo chorus designed to be used before your amp’s input.  
139 Classic Detune  
This program puts a dual pitch shifter in front of your amp. It loads set to the classic ±8  
cent values — but feel free to tweak these.  
Bass Effects  
Programs 140-145 are optimized for bass sounds.  
(Amp Input Only)  
140 BassComp1  
A preamp and compressor.  
141 BassCompChrs  
A preamp compressor and chorus.  
142 Bass Fuzz  
A preamp with distortion.  
143 BassPitchPdl  
A preamp with a pedal controlling the pitch up and octave. Press A/B to go up or down  
an octave.  
144 BootsyBass  
Bass preamp with a Bootsy-style auto wah.  
9-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Pro g ra m De sc rip tio ns  
Programs 145-149 are set up to have the MPX G2 front panel buttons or the MPX R1  
control:  
JamMan  
(Amp Input Only)  
Tap = Record Loop  
A/B = Layer  
Delay = Clear Loop  
145 Jam 1 S&H+  
Loads with a Sample & Hold style effect. The MPX R1 Toe Switch activates pedal control  
of volume.  
146 Jam1Cordovox  
The MPX R1 Toe Switch turns the Cordovox effect on and off, the pedal controls the  
Cordovox speed. Press Gain for Overdrive.  
147 Jam1 Uni+  
Loads with Univybe. Press Gain for overdrive. The MPX R1 Toe Switch activates pedal  
control of volume or wah.  
Programs 148-149 are set up to have the MPX G2 front panel buttons or the MPX R1  
control:  
Tap = Record Loop  
A/B = Replace  
Delay = Start/Stop Loop  
148 Jam 2 Pitch+  
Loads with Distortion and Pitch. The MPX R1 Toe Switch swaps pedal controls between  
volume (Toe Switch off) and pitch (Toe Switch on).  
149 Jam 2 Flange+  
Loads with a Jet Flange. Press Gain for Screamer. The MPX R1 Toe Switch activates  
pedal control of volume or wah.  
9-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Programs 150-248 are designed to be used with the MPX G2  
connected directly to a mixer or power amp  
Front Panel  
Turn Output to a comfortable  
listening level.  
Turn Input to 2 o'clock.  
Rear Panel  
OR  
to stereo headphones  
to Left and Right inputs of a  
mixer or power amp  
150 Big Blue  
Top Ten  
A smooth and creamy high-gain analog preamp with a classic RedComp before the  
preamp to add super sustain. After the preamp section is a lush wet chorus which enters  
adualdelaywithTaptempocontrol.TheentiresignalthengoesthroughaclassicLexicon  
Large Hall. A/B switches gain from high-gain to bluesy clean. Great for leads! The MPX  
R1 pedal controls volume, which is the first effect in the chain so that you can create  
ethereal textural sounds. The MPX R1 Toe Switch turns volume on and off.  
(Stand Alone)  
151 Blues Club  
A creamy blues sound with just a hint of compression in a medium room to create the  
feeling of playing in an actual Blues Club. Can I buy you a beer?A/B shuts reverb off and  
turns on a Tap tempo delay. The MPX R1 Toe Switch activates pedal control of volume  
or wah.  
152 Acoustifier  
Acoustify yourelectricguitar!Acoustic sound withDetuningand Reverbworks especially  
well on the neck pickup. A/B shuts reverb off and turns on a Tap tempo delay. The MPX  
R1 pedal controls volume to let you swell your chords into the Reverb.  
153 British Stack  
Classic British style gain with a hint of ambience to fatten up the sound. Play your favorite  
classic riffs with this sound. A/B adds a gain boost. The MPX R1 Toe Switch activates  
pedal wah.  
154 PedalSwell  
Smooth gain and compression with chorus and delay that go into a panner. A truly stereo  
effect. A/Bcontrols delayfeedback timefrom 20-80%.The MPXR1 pedalletsyoucreate  
ethereal volume swells, the Toe Switch controls pedal on and off. Tap sets delay times.  
155 Clean Jimi  
This program lets you use A/B to alternate between two clean sounds inspired by the  
double-stop rhythm riffing in tunes like “The Wind Cries Mary” and “Little Wing”. The A  
sound is clean guitar into a plate reverb with 15 ips predelay. The B sound adds pre-gain  
Univybe and gain boost for a little grit. A Model C Wah is waiting to be kicked on with the  
MPX R1 Toe Switch.  
9-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Pro g ra m De sc rip tio ns  
156 Metal Stack  
Get out your heaviest chops and burn. Super high gain setting with lots of tone and just  
ahint ofambience. A/Bchanges thesoundfrom dirtyto clean andadds morereverb.The  
MPX R1 Toe Switch activates pedal wah.  
157. Pdl Octaves  
Useapedal tocreateoutrageousoctavesweeps. A/Bchangesthedirectionofthesweep  
(A=octave up, B=octave down). Chorus, delay and reverb are in the effects loop. Check  
out the Glide parameter in the Soft Row. When it’s set to Off, the pedal prodcues a  
chromatic glissando instead of a continuous glide.  
158 Guitar Solo  
Fat spongy dynamic distortion with detuning delay and classic plate reverb. A sound very  
reminiscent of Eric Johnson. A/B controls delay damping. The MPX R1 pedal lets you  
swell yourchords into thereverb, theToe Switch controls pedal on andoff.Tapsets echo  
times.  
159 JamMan  
It’s baaaack!!!!!!! A medium-gain preamp with a chorus, reverb and a 20-second single  
loop JamMan! The MPX G2 front panel buttons or the MPX R1 control:  
Tap = Record Loop  
A/B = Layer  
Delay = Clear Loop  
TheMPXR1ToeSwitchletsthepedalcontrolvolume(ToeSwitchoff)orwah(ToeSwitch  
on).  
Artist/Song  
Programs 160-179 give you signature sounds from artists and from specific songs.  
(Stand Alone)  
160 Jimmy P…  
ClassicZeptonewith avintage platereverb.TrytheintrotoWholeLotta Love”.TheMPX  
R1 Toe Switch activates pedal wah.  
161 Satch…  
TrySummerSongwiththis one.PressA/BtoswitchfromSatch dirtytoSatchcleanwith  
more chorus. The MPX R1 Toe Switch activates pedal wah.  
162 Kiss the Sky  
Hendrix-style preamp with an Octabuzz. A/B turns off the Octabuzz and switches  
between two different echo times. The MPX R1 Toe Switch activates pedal control of  
volume.  
163 Angus…  
“Back in Black” anyone?  
164 The Edge…  
Takes you to “Where the Streets have no Name”. A syncopated delay with Tap control  
of delay times. The MPX R1 pedal controls pre-gain volume, the Toe Switch turns the  
pedal on and off.  
165 Sandman  
A/B controls channel switching from Hammett Dirty to Hammett clean. The MPX R1 Toe  
Switch activates pedal wah.  
166 Brian M…  
Medium gain with a slight bit of detuning. The MPX R1 Toe Switch activates pedal wah.  
9-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
167 Blow By…  
Play any riff from this album. A simple, moderately clean sound. The MPX R1 Toe Switch  
activates pedal wah.  
168 Old Eddie  
ClassicVHtonefromthefirstcoupleofalbumswiththereverbhard-pannedtotheright.  
A/Bswapsbetweenan OrangePhase oraFlanger inspired byUnchained”. PressDelay  
for a single repeat echo beforethe preamp. The MPX R1 pedal controls pre-gain volume,  
the Toe Switch turns the pedal on and off.  
169 New Eddie  
Abitofdetuneandit’s5150time.A/Baddsastereodelayand abitmorereverb.TheMPX  
R1 Toe Switch activates pedal wah.  
170 LiveJimi  
Classic Hendrix tone with a Univybe and a plate reverb. Press A/B to shut off the reverb  
and add an Octabuzz effect and a slapback echo for some classic Hendrix tones. The  
MPX R1 pedal controls volume, the Toe Switch turns the pedal on and off.  
171 Cliffs of…  
A fat overdriven tone with pregain inspired by Eric Johnson. RedComp for compression,  
detuning, delays and vintage plate reverb. A/B makes the overall sound of the effects  
wetter. The MPX R1 Toe Switch activates pedal wah.  
172 Cold Shot  
Classic Stevie Ray tone with a Vibro Tone rotary speaker effect. A/B controls the slow  
and fast rotary settings. The MPX R1 Toe Switch activates pedal wah.  
173 Carlos S…  
A fat California sound with lots of highs rolled off, and a bit of reverb.  
174 Jazzman  
A classic jazz sound remniscent of Pat Metheny. Warm clean tone with compression,  
chorus, stereo delays and a lush reverb. The MPX R1 pedal controls volume, the Toe  
Switch turns the pedal on and off.  
175 Boston  
The mid range over-compressed chorused distortion sound that sold millions. Press A/  
Bfor Boston-style dual delays. The MPX R1 pedal controls volume, the Toe Switch turns  
the pedal on and off.  
176 Purple Reign  
“The Artist” at his best. Clean tone, lush chorus and reverb. MPX R1 Toe Switch swaps  
the pedal controls from a volume to wah pedal. The MPX R1 pedal controls the volume  
or wah depending on the state of the Toe Switch.  
177 Another Brick  
This echo/chorus program was inspired by Pink Floyd. “Hey! Leave those kids alone!”  
PressA/Btosplitdelaytimesinhalf.TheMPXR1pedalcontrolsvolume,soyoucanswell  
your chords into the reverb. The Toe Switch turns the pedal On and Off.  
178 China Grove  
Medium gain with a single echo creates the sound. It’s that simple. The MPX R1 Toe  
Switch activates pedal wah.  
179 Tush  
I’ve been up, I’ve been down…Check out this ZZ Top inspired sound. The MPX R1 Toe  
Switch activates pedal wah.  
9-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Pro g ra m De sc rip tio ns  
Programs 180-199 give you a collection of guitar amp tones from vintage to modern and  
everything in between.  
Amp Collection  
(Stand Alone)  
180 AmericanClean  
SupercleanAmericanroundcleansoundwithlotsofheadroom.Plentyoflowsandhighs.  
Great for clean chords or country leads.  
181 AmericanOD  
Adds a bit of Overdrive to American Clean to simulate the amp being cranked up. Great  
for country rock.  
182 AmericanGain  
An American amp overdriven with a hint of ambience. Responds well to dynamics — use  
this for a straight-ahead rock sound.  
183 Roadhouse  
Straight-ahead bluesy preamp with just enough grit and some tasty reverb.  
184 Taxmania  
Use this sound with classic 60’s pop riffs.  
185 British 60’s  
The medium overdriven sound of a British amplifier. Think Hendrix.  
186 British 70’s  
A moderately overdriven sound based on British 60’s with more overall gain. Think  
Zeppelin.  
187 British 80’s  
Classic British style high-gain amp with a touch of ambience to open up the sound. Great  
for leads or chunky rhythms. Think Van Halen.  
188 AmericanMod  
AhotroddedAmericanstyleampwithlots ofbottomendandsustain.Think EricJohnson.  
189 ModernHiGain  
Super high gain with tons of sustain and a bit of ambience. Great for metal leads and  
rhythms. Think Metallica.  
190 TransChorus1  
A popular solid-state twin with built-in chorus.  
191 TransChorus2  
The same solid-state twin as TransChorus1 with different chorus and tone settings.  
192 Jazz Bright  
Tight, articulate and bright. This amp will really bring out those clean fluid lines. It has a  
built-in chorus and silky reverb too.  
193 Jazz Dark  
This amp is set for a darker tone to give some weight to comping and chord melodies.  
Push it hard to put an edge on your bop — Imagine an organ trio in a smoke-filled club.  
194 Acoustic  
Apreampsoundwhich canmakeyourcleanelectricguitarsoundalmostacoustic.Works  
especially well on the neck pickup.  
9-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
195 Little Amp  
A tiny “hog-style” amp with a 6 inch speaker.  
196 Phone Filter  
Overcompressed and drastically EQ’d, this is an effective way to accent a part or phrase  
within a mix.  
197 Vibro Cab  
The original Vibro Tone guitar cabinet had a rotating baffle in front of a 12 inch guitar  
speaker. Itproduced aswirlingsoundby sprayingthe speaker output throughthe topand  
sides of the cabinet as the baffle rotated. A built-in crossover sent high frequencies back  
totheoriginalguitarampsothatthetopendsounddidn’tswirl.Weuseacrossover,stereo  
chorus and auto panners to create the effect. A/B toggles between slow and fast rotary  
speeds  
198 Cordovox  
The original Cordovox had a rotating baffle cabinet. It had an 8 inch speaker which had  
pretty limited bass and treble frequency response and distorted quite easily. Sound was  
projected out of the top and sides of the cabinet. Our version uses the preamp to recreate  
the amp and speaker characteristics. The sound is gritty, so when you dig in you get a  
lot of distortion but, as you play lighter or switch to less powerful pickups, you get cleaner  
sounds. Stereo chorus and auto panners are used to create the swirl. A/B toggles  
between slow and fast rotary speeds.  
199 Rotary Cab  
A Leslie speaker has separate rotating elements for treble and bass. Our version adds  
Chamber reverb to put the cab in in a small room. The preamp sound is clean with a little  
bit of grit, so when you dig in you get some distortion. A/B button controls fast and slow  
speeds of the rotary speaker.  
Programs 200-209 are designed to give you a suite of realistic reverberation and  
ambience treatments for electric and acoustic guitar tracks. Think of this as adding  
severaldifferentlive-trackingrooms plussomeclassic Lexiconreverbprocessorstoyour  
studio.  
Studio Spaces  
(Stand Alone)  
Each program can be used stand alone for tracking — just plug in your guitar and record  
direct through the MPX G2 built-in preamp. (You can easily change the preamp by using  
Copy Effect in Edit mode to copy the preamp from any other program.  
These programs can also be used for tracking with an external preamp as well as for  
processing pre-recorded tracks during mixdown.  
When using an external preamp, connect its outputs to the MPX G2 Insert Return jacks.  
Use the MPX G2 Speaker Simulator to fine tune the raw preamp sound.  
To process pre-recorded tracks, connect the MPX G2 Insert Returns to your console’s  
sends as you would any stereo processor. Turn off the MPX G2 Speaker Simulator and  
Noise Gate, and set Post Mix (in Edit: Mix mode) to 100% wet.  
200 TrackingRoom  
This program features the Ambience effect. Use it to add room sound without adding the  
decay associated with reverberation. This is a great way to add “air” to when you’re  
tracking direct. Stereo EQ(in the Soft Row) lets you fine tune the sparkle and boom (high  
and low frequencies).  
9-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Pro g ra m De sc rip tio ns  
201 Acoustic Room  
This program is designed for acoustic guitar. The reverb blooms nicely behind the notes  
thanks to a compressor on the reverb inputs.  
202 Jazz Club  
A moderate, but dense, reverb that fattens up cleanly articulated melodies and chords.  
Be sure to experiment with reverb predelay (P Dly in the Soft Row). Use it to allow the  
attack of notes to stay “in your face”  
Programs 203-205 can be used individually or in any combination. Each is made up of  
amedium-sized, live roomhungwithnearandfarmicrophonepairs. RvbMix controlsthe  
overall direct-to-room sound mix. The Far Mics parameter provides an independent  
control for the level of the distant microphones. You’ll find these parameters, as well as  
PDly and the other important reverb tweaks in the Soft Row.  
203 Solo Room  
A high-gain amp in a live room with a direct feed, as well as near and far microphones.  
Both sets of mics are stereo pairs. The overall image is balanced in the stereo field.  
204 RhythmRoom L  
A clean amp in the same live room as Solo Room, but with the near mics panned left of  
centerand thefarmics panned right ofcenter.Thestereoimage is left-heavy on rhythmic  
attacks, and shifts to the right as the notes fade.  
205 RhythmRoom R  
SimilartoRhythmRoomL,withthepanningofthemicsreversed.Initialattacksareheard  
on the right side, then shift to the left as the notes fade.  
206 MicPlacement  
This program lets you vary the position of a close microphone in front of high-gain amp.  
(Use the Placement parameter in the Soft Row.) Altering the position will create phase  
differences that change the overall timbre of the sound.  
207 Tape->Plate  
This combination of tape predelay in front of a plate reverb can be heard on most of the  
classic rock recordings from the 60’s and 70’s. A/B changes the tape delay from 15ips  
to 7.5ips.  
208 PCM 60 Room  
This program recreates the settings of a Lexicon PCM 60, tweaked for guitar.  
209 Gated Verb  
More of an effect than a natural space, gated reverb can be quite useful to thicken up  
rhythmic parts without spilling over into the rest of the mix.  
9-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Studio Effects Programs 210-219 are designed to give you a collection of classic studio effects for  
recording guitar tracks. Each program can be used stand alone for tracking — just plug  
in your guitar and record direct through the MPX G2 built-in preamp. (You can easily  
change the preamp by using the Copy Effect function in Edit mode to copy the preamp  
from any other program.  
(Stand Alone)  
These programs can also be used for tracking with an external preamp as well as for  
processing pre-recorded tracks during mixdown.  
When using an external preamp, connect its outputs to the MPX G2 Insert Return jacks.  
Use the MPX G2 Speaker Simulator to fine tune the raw preamp sound.  
To process pre-recorded tracks, connect the MPX G2 Insert Returns to your console’s  
sends as you would any stereo processor. Turn off the MPX G2 Speaker Simulator and  
Noise Gate, and set Post Mix (in Edit: Mix mode) to 100% wet.  
Note: Program 218 Analog Echo and 219 InfiniteEcho are designed to get input from  
the MPX G2 Guitar Input jack. When using these MPX G2 programs with a console,  
connect the console send to the MPX G2 Guitar input.  
210 Classic Detune  
A simple but gorgeous effect. The dual pitch shifter is used to independently detune the  
leftandrightsidesofthestereofield.Theclassic settingsare±8cents,butfeelfreemodify  
these default settings.  
211 Comp + Chrs  
Compressor and stereo chorus combined for a chiming effect. Stereo delays are tuned  
up too, but are bypassed when the program loads. Press Delay to bring them in.  
212 Stereo Phaser  
Two separate OrangePhaser effects independently process left and right channels.  
213 Env AutoPan  
RedComp pumps up the signal before it gets to Preamp. From there, it runs through  
reverb auto pan, chorus and delay. The twist here is that the panner rate is envelope-  
controlled. Play a big chord and listen to what happens as it rings out. The MPX R1 pedal  
controls the depth of the panning. Tap sets the delay rhythm.  
214 Env AutoWahs  
An alternative take on standard tremolo effects. Dual auto wahs are controlled by your  
playing dynamics. The MPX R1 pedal controls the depth of both wahs.  
215 EnvFilter LP  
A very funky, synth-like effect, reminiscent of a Mu-tron III set to “LP”. The dynamics of  
your playing opens and closes a resonant filter. A/B brings in some stereo echoes. The  
MPX R1 pedal controls the effects sensitivity to your playing dynamics. The Toe Switch  
turns the effect on and off.  
216 Dual Delay  
Basic, but essential. Left and right channel delays — each with independent delay time  
(up to 10 seconds), level, pan and feedback controls. Everything is in the Soft Row for  
instant access. You can make one or both of these delays tempo-controlled. Just press  
Options with the Time parameter displayed, select “echoes:beat” and press Options  
again.  
9-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Pro g ra m De sc rip tio ns  
217 EQ Delay  
A mono 20-second delay with 2-band parameteric EQ in the feedback path. In this  
program the EQis set to simulate the frequency roll-offs associated with analog tape, but  
youcancreateallsortsofunusualechoeffectsbyvaryingtheEQparameters.Everything  
youneed isin theSoftRow.(Becareful withEQGainsettingswhenusingdelay feedback  
— in general, it’s best to cut EQ Gain rather than boost it.)  
218 Analog Echo  
This program produces sounds with many of the characteristics of vintage analog echo  
effectsincludingthetendencytorunawayifyoupushthe feedbacktoo hard.Ifyou’ve  
ever played around with an old tape echo, you’ll recognize this sound. This key to this  
effect is putting the analog Gain block inside the delay feedback loop. The signal is  
recirculated throughtheanalogsectioneverytimethe delay repeats.Theresultis aliteral  
analog echo. A stereo chorus is inserted in the feedback loop as well. Note that, as Insert  
Returns are also in the feedback loop, the Insert path is bypassed when this program is  
loaded.  
219 InfiniteEcho  
A variation of Analog Echo that adds the BlueComp compressor and Detune(M) to the  
analog feedback path. The compressor limits the feedback signal so that the effect never  
runs away. You can increase the number of repeats by turning up the front panel tone  
controls as well as altering the Delay Fbk parameter in the Soft Row. Note that, as Insert  
Returns are also in the feedback loop, the Insert path is bypassed when this program is  
loaded.  
Styles  
Programs220-229 give you playing styles from Surf to Techno.  
(Stand Alone)  
220 Surf’s Up!  
A surf sound that would make even Dick Dale envious. PressTap to change the tremolo  
rate.  
221 Slide Comp  
Agrittypreamp andtwocompressorsinseries.This is aslideplayerssecretthat enables  
them to get singing sustain when playing with a light touch.  
222 Funk+FX  
Ultra-clean,supercompressedsound withchorusandalittlebit ofambiencetoaddsome  
depth. The MPX R1 Toe Switch activates pedal wah.  
223 Ballad Lead  
Perfect lead sound for a rock ballad. Warm high-gain preamp with a hint of chorus and  
Tap tempo delay. All this flows into a lush plate reverb. The MPX R1 pedal controls  
volume. The Toe Switch turns the pedal on and off.  
224 De DaDaDa  
A great overall clean sound inspired by Andy Summers. A/B adds delay and more flange  
depth. Tap controls the rhythm of the delay times. The MPX R1 pedal controls volume.  
The Toe Switch turns the pedal on and off.  
225 Rockabilly  
Country chops — a clean preamp with some slap back echo and a little ambience. A/B  
changes from one slap back time delay time to another. The MPX R1 pedal controls  
volume. The Toe Switch turns the pedal on and off.  
9-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
226 Country Rock  
Similar to Rockabilly with a hotter, more overdriven preamp sound. Useful for a lot of  
current country sounds. A/B changes from one slap back time delay time to another. The  
MPX R1 pedal controls volume. The Toe Switch turns the pedal on and off.  
227 Ultra Clean  
An Alex Lifeson type clean sound with a triplet delay.  
228 Acoustic&FX  
An acoustic style preamp with compression and a chamber reverb. The MPX R1 pedal  
controls volume. The Toe Switch turns the pedal on and off.  
229 TechnoChords  
Playachordand letit ringout. Randomtones ringout intodelayandreverb.A/Bchanges  
the mix of the effect so that more of the original signal can be heard. Tap changes delay  
time. The MPX R1 Toe Switch gives you pedal control of volume or of volume with a  
sweep filter scale.  
Live Rigs  
(Stand Alone)  
Programs 230-232 are rigs in which the MPX G2 A/B button changes the program from  
a lead sound with various effects to a rhythm sound with different effects.  
230 Modern A/B  
Super saturated high-gain lead sound with Tap tempo delay control. A/B replaces the  
delay with reverb, and changes the preamp from lead to rhythm. The MPX R1 pedal  
controls volume. The Toe Switch turns the pedal on and off.  
231 British A/B  
The lead sound is classic British style gain with delay. A/B switches from dirty with delay  
to clean with chorus and reverb. The MPX R1 Toe Switch activates pedal wah.  
232 Amercan A/B  
The lead sound combines overdriven American gain with compression, and echo. A/B  
switchesfromcompressionandechotoUniVybewithreverb.TheMPXR1pedalcontrols  
volume. The Toe Switch turns the pedal on and off.  
Programs 233-239 give you a variety of tremolo-based and pitch effects.  
Tremolo/Pitch  
(Stand Alone)  
233 Detune Trem  
This one delivers the big throb with a tempo-controlled tremolo in front of your amp, dual  
pitch shift, delay and reverb in the effects loop. Tremolo depth is pedal-controlled. A/B  
goes from dry to wet.  
234 DualAutoWahs  
Dual auto wahs are controlled by your playing dynamics. The pedal controls the depth of  
the stereo wahs. A/B goes from dry to wet.  
235 TremoWah  
An LFO/tempo-controlled wah before a high-gain preamp, followed by an LFO/tempo-  
controlled tremolo which flows into a tempo-controlled delay and then a stereo panner.  
Listen to the results! A/B changes the mix value of the wah and tremolo. The MPX R1  
pedal controls volume, the Toe Switch turns the pedal on and off.  
9-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Pro g ra m De sc rip tio ns  
236 Pitch Cascade  
This special effect is created by putting a dual pitch shifter in the feedback loop of a dual  
delay. Tap sets the delay rhythm. After going through the delay, the notes are pitch  
shifted. (A/B selects between up a fifth/down an octave and down a fourth/up an octave/  
.)Then the pitch-shifted notes are recirculated through the delay and pitch-shifted again.  
The recirculation is controlled by the XFbk1 and XFbk2 parameters. (They’re in the Soft  
Row along with delay time and other goodies.)  
237 Octaves  
Use a pedal to fade two additional harmony voices in and out. A/B alternates between  
tunings. A=one octave up (doubled). B=one ocatve down and two octaves down.  
238 Pdl 2nds  
A pedal gives you whole step bends. A=bend up. B=bend down.  
239 E Maj/Min 3  
Tune up and play melodies in the Key of E. The DiatonicHmy effect automatically  
harmonizes your notes in thirds. Use A/B to alternate between E Major and E Minor  
(Aeolian). You can change to any other key by adjusting the value of the Key parameter  
— you’ll find it in the Soft Row.  
Bass Effects  
Programs 240-244 are designed for bass.  
(Stand Alone)  
240 BassComp1  
A preamp and compressor.  
241 BassCompChrs  
A preamp compressor and chorus.  
242 Bass Fuzz  
A preamp with distortion.  
243 BassPitchPdl  
A preamp with a pedal controlling the pitch up and octave. Press A/B to go up or down  
an octave.  
244 BootsyBass  
Bass preamp with a Bootsy-style auto wah.  
9-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Programs 245-248 are set up to have the MPX G2 front panel buttons or the MPX R1  
control:  
JamMan  
(Stand Alone)  
Tap = Record Loop  
A/B = Layer  
Delay = Clear Loop  
245 Jam 1 S&H+  
Loads with moderately clean preamp and a Sample & Hold style effect into a large hall  
Reverb. The MPX R1 pedal controls the volume, or volume with sweep filter scale,  
depending on the state of the Toe Switch.  
246 Jam1Cordovox  
Loads with a creamy overdriven preamp and a Cordovox effect with reverb. The MPX R1  
Toe Switch turns the Cordovox effect on and off, the pedal controls the Cordovox speed.  
Programs 247 and 248 are set up to have the MPX G2 front panel buttons or the MPX  
R1 control:  
Tap = Record Loop  
A/B = Replace  
Delay = Start/Stop Loop  
247 Jam 2 Pitch+  
Loadswith high-gainpreamp,PitchandAmbience.TheMPXR1ToeSwitchswapspedal  
controls between volume (Toe Switch off) and pitch (Toe Switch on).  
248 Jam2AutoWah  
Clean style preamp with auto wah. The MPX R1 Toe Switch determines whether the  
pedal controls volume or wah.  
249 Unity Gain  
Utility  
This program is set up for testing a unity gain signal in all configurations.  
(All Configurations)  
250 Clean Slate  
Want to start from scratch? This one’s as empty as they get.  
9-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Troubleshooting  
This chapter is intended primarily to help you recognize some common error  
states which canbecorrectedfrom the MPXG2 front panel, or bysimplemeans  
such as cable replacement. Any error states which are not covered here should  
be referred to your local dealer or Lexicon Customer Service.  
Technical support is also available at:  
http://www.lexicon.com/support/homeframe.htm  
http://www.lexicon.com/kbase/kbase.asp  
In a low-voltage, or "brown-out" condition (less than 40VAC), the MPX G2 will  
freeze in its current state. None of the controls will have any effect. When power  
returns to a normal level, the unit will reset itself as though it had just been  
powered on. If the unit does not reset itself, turn the power OFF, then ON to  
resume normal operation.  
Low Voltage  
Overheating  
Temperature extremes may cause the MPX G2 to exhibit unpredictable behav-  
ior. If the unit has been subjected to temperatures below 32°F (0°C) or above  
95°F (35°C), it should be turned off andallowed to return to normal temperature  
before use. Theunit maybedamagedbyexposuretotemperatures below -22°F  
(-30°C) or above 167°F (75°C), or by exposure to humidity in excess of 95%. If  
a unit exposed to such conditions fails to operate after it returns to a normal  
operating temperature, contact your local service representative.  
The MPX G2 doesn't respond to MIDI Program Changes.  
Common MIDI  
Problems  
The MPX G2 and connected devices must be set to matching MIDI Channels,  
or the MPX G2 must have OMNI selected for receipt of MIDI messages. In the  
System mode MIDI menu, check the Receive control for the MIDI Channel  
selected, as well as the MIDI Channel of the transmitting device.  
Make sure that Pgm Change in the System mode MIDI menu is set to On. See  
Chapter 6: MIDI Operation for Program Change messages which may be  
ignored by the MPX G2.  
Check MIDI In/Out connections between the units.  
MIDI Program Change numbers are off by 1.  
TheMPXG2transmits andrecognizesProgramChangemessages 0-127. MIDI  
devices which transmit 1-128 rather than 0-127, will be off by 1.  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
The MPX G2 doesn't respond to SysEx commands.  
Check the SysEx setting (and the Receive Device ID selection) in the System  
mode MIDI menu.  
The MPX G2 does not transmit SysEx Automation commands.  
ChecktheAutomationsetting(andtheXmitDeviceIDselection)intheSystem  
mode MIDI menu.  
The MPX G2 performs a series of self tests each time it is powered on, then  
displays the MPX G2 copyright notice. This should be followed by the display  
and loading of the last loaded effect. If this sequence does not occur, contact  
Lexicon Customer Service.  
Power On Behavior  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
MPX G2  
Specifications  
I/O  
Instrument input: mono 1/4 inch 1megunbalanced, with analog soft clipping circuit and front  
panel input level control  
Levels: minimum +2.2dBu for full scale, maximum +10dBu max  
A/D: 24-bit  
Return Inputs: stereo, 1/4 inch, 50kunbalanced, with analog soft clipping circuit and  
ganged level control on rear panel  
Levels: minimum –10dBu for full scale  
maximum +18dBu max (for +4 nominal inputs)  
+18 dBu with rear level pot at minimum  
A/D: 24-bit  
Main L and R Outputs: 1/4 inch TRS balanced (2), XLR 3-wire balanced (2)  
Nominal Level: front panel adjustable to +4dBu  
Maximum Output Level: balanced: +18dBu into 600Ω  
unbalanced: +21dBu into 100kΩ  
D/A: 24-bit  
Send Output: mono, 1/4 inch unbalanced  
Nominal Level: software adjustable to +4dBu  
Maximum Output Level: +18dBu into 100kΩ  
D/A: 24-bit  
Audio performance  
Frequency response: 20Hz to 20kHz;  
+1 to -1.5dB for input to send  
+1 to -1.5dB for return to output  
THD+N: <0.01%, at 1kHz nominal output level  
.01% at 1kHz insert returns to main output  
.01% at 1kHz input to main outputs  
Dynamic Range: Instrument input to send:  
-110dB (unweighted) minimum Input to Send with Relay Bypass on  
-120dB (unweighted) Input to Send with Noise Gate on  
-97dB (unweighted) typical instrument to main outputs in Bypass  
Sample rate: 44.1kHz  
Return Mix: When the Return Mix option is selected, MPX G2 will mix the analog Aux  
inputs with the post converter output signal from the DSP.  
Throughput delay  
without send/return loop: Input to Main Output <3ms, nominal  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPX G2 Use r Guid e  
Le xic o n  
Internal Audio Data Paths  
Conversion: 24-bit A/D, 24-bit D/A  
DSP: 32 bits  
Control Interface  
MIDI: 7-pin DIN connector for MIDI IN/powered bidirectional remote  
5-pin DIN connectors for MIDI THRU and OUT  
Footswitch: 1/4 inch T/R/S phone jack for 3 independent footswitches  
Foot pedal: 1/4 inch T/R/S phone jack (10kmin, 100kmax impedance)  
Remote Power In: 2.5mm barrel for 9VAC remote power  
General  
Dimensions: 19.0"W x 1.75"H x 13"D (483 x 45 x 330mm)  
19 inch rack mount standard, 1U high  
Weight: Net: 7.2lbs (3.2kg)  
Shipping: 11lbs (4.98kg)  
Power Requirements: 100-240VAC, 50-60Hz, 25W, 3-pin IEC power connector  
Environment: Operating temperature: 32˚ to 104˚F (0˚ to 40˚C)  
Storage temperature: -20˚ to 170˚F (-30˚ to 75˚C)  
Humidity: maximum 95% without condensation  
Electrical Approvals  
Safety Compliance: UL1419 and CSA 22.2 No. 1-94 (UL and C-UL marks)  
EN60065 (TUV-GS and CE marking per Directive 73/23/EEC)  
EMC Compliance: FCC Class B  
EN55022 Class B and EN50082-1  
(CE marking per Directive 89/336/EEC)  
Specifications subject to change without notice.  
11-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Krell Industries Stereo Amplifier KAV 250p User Manual
Lanzar Car Audio Car Stereo System VIBE X6 User Manual
Liebert Refrigerator XDP160RA User Manual
Life Fitness Exercise Bike MO51 0K63 A295 User Manual
LOREX Technology Home Security System SG19LD80 User Manual
Lowrance electronic GPS Receiver AirMap 500 User Manual
LST Smoke Alarm PA58 3 User Manual
Master Lock Portable Generator HWI3000 MGH3000 MGH4000C MGH4000CI MGH5000C MGH5000CI MGH5000CIE MGH6000C MGH6000CI MGH7000C MGH7000CI MGH10000 User Manual
MB QUART Car Stereo System QS216 User Manual
Melitta Coffeemaker ME2TMDS User Manual